Home

2008 RT Caravan Owner Manual

1. ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS IF EQUIPPED To the left of the instrument panel cup holder are two 12 volt power outlets The upper outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the lower outlet is connected directly to the battery The upper outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package A third outlet is located on the driver s side just to the rear of the sliding door and is also controlled by the ignition switch The lower and rear outlets will not accommodate a conventional cigar lighter unit The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or battery symbol indicating the power source The lower instrument panel outlet is powered directly from the battery items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent engine starting The lower outlet is protected by an automatic reset circuit breaker The automatic circuit breaker restores power es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 when the overload is removed The circuit breaker also supplies power to the outlet in the removable floor console when in the front position Refer to section 3 Removable Floor Console in this manual NOTE If desired all of the power outlets can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the OFF position POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 110 volt 150 watt inverter outlet if equipped converts DC current to
2. 322 Bl Engine Block Heater If Equipped 312 306 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN M Power Steering unes ke r taksa RR ae dee 323 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 324 Acceleration 22s e IRE gro 324 TACHO x ors atk hacen Ed md de TAE RC ae ae 324 Bl Driving Through Water 0 0 325 Flowing Rising Water 0 325 Shallow Standing Water 325 la Tire Safety Information es Rn 327 Tire Markings 3 3 ases e rr 327 Tire Identification Number TIN 330 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 331 Bl Tires General Information 335 Tite Pressure ie yer ab Race 335 Tire Inflation Pressures 336 Radial Ply Tires 338 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 339 Limited Use Spare If Equipped 339 Tire SPINNING icai Gada este d y Dew 3 340 Tread Wear Indicators 341 Wife OF Tires ee deeem eu PRECES WES 341 Replacement Tires espeta ranas piekrastes 342 Alignment And Balance 343 a Tire Chains serena fae ear RR 3 HER 344 E Snow Ties ioc eat RR tee 345 B Tire Rotation 0 0 cee eee 345 lll Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Basic TPMS Without EVIC If Equipped Premium TPMS With EVIC If Equipped
3. 0 0 191 Ignition Off Operation 6 191 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 li Electrical Power Outlets If Equipped 192 Door Trim Panel Storage 205 Power Inverter If Equipped 193 Driver Seat Back Storage If Equipped 206 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 194 Second Row Seat Storage Bins ll Sun Screens If Equipped 194 ee ee ll Convenience Tray Drawer And Cup Holders 196 Oxedi ad Console Storage I Equipped s Removable Floor Console With Stow n Go Instrument Panel Cup Holders 196 Seating If Equipped 208 Bottle Holders ss 0g a Cae eR 197 Rear Compartment Storage Bins 210 Optional Smoker s Package Kit 197 Coat Hooks L L cece ese m Mi Console Features 0 0 0 cee eee 197 Csi Ape pie Bes sess cia tune cine 211 Basic Console Features 197 li Roof Luspap Racks I Byuipped aerei 212 En eae ee a roa T 213 W Sior ge ossis E EIER ESAE EES 204 Mieka Levine MENU serenada unii 214 Glove Compartments 0 204 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror
4. 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent
5. Press the button rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 e The pedals can be adjusted while driving ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over the accelerator e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R peran at specds greater than OS mph dO Fen Reverse or when the Speed Control System is ON The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Sys tem EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage 81bc4c2c to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim i ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the Electronic Speed Control Switches adjustable pedal s path 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Activate Push the ON OFF button located in the end of the lever once and the CRUISE indicator light located in the message window of the odometer will illuminate show ing the electronic speed control system is on To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button again and the system and indicator will turn off
6. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings Check TPMS Message General Information ll Fuel Requirements Fuel Requirements 3 3L amp 3 8L Gasoline Engines Fuel Requirements 4 0L Gasoline Engines Reformulated Gasoline Gasoline Oxygenate Blends MMT In Gasoline Materials Added To Fuel 349 351 352 353 355 355 Fuel System Cautions Carbon Monoxide Warnings ll Adding Fuel Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ll Flexible Fuel 3 3L Engines Only E 85 General Information Ethanol Fuel E 85 Fuel Requirements Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles Starting Cruising Range Replacement Parts 00 0 365 Maintenance leen 365 a Vehicle Loading ick b re 366 Vehicle Certification Label LL 366 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 366 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 366 TESE ME 367 RI SIZE ou faoc asa iss eo P CERE ets 367 Inflation Pressure 00 000 008 367 Curb Weight sese gia ae ee as 367 Overloading 4 nag acre edes rae e aua sate 367 Loading scusa ees 368 E Trailer Towing Common Towing Definitions Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer To
7. Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 332 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exce
8. Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch th
9. The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and mp3 wma tracks the radio will only play the mp3 wma tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rat
10. When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the window below the speed ometer NE Eight point compass headings are displayed N S E W NE NW SE SW jer Temperature Fahrenheit or Celsius AVG Average Fuel Economy U S or Metric DIE ee tigers on RG tay c E TEILS Distance to Empty EL pecvseesdnuees ex d pi edes Elapsed Time Pcs aa ee Raat dS eta sen RA Park Assist On 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Should this wrench symbol display with the letter P next to it your park assist system needs servicing NOTE Temperature and Average Fuel Economy can be changed from U S or Metric by pressing and holding the left secondary push button Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to trip A or trip B Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset Compass Temperature Display Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings In order to ensure compa
11. 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the occupied driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h Belt Alert Programming BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position DaimlerChrysler does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and
12. 98 Heated Remote Control Mirrors It Equipped lt se lt s6 beans joes hd wits 102 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 98 Driver s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 102 It Equipped coss derer toon prede em 99 Outside Mirrors o oo eee ee RT Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature 100 E T EE 104 Ever ae RUNU Phone Call Features 4 111 If Equipped iier RR pirts rrt 100 UConnect System Features 114 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Advanced Phone Connectivity 119 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer 151 dris Re en Know About Your T ll Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 151 General M UR 429 ee ees end Linking Remote locati oos heme 129 ad id RR Husa an Menut Tont amp Secma Row Sent Adusia os 100 Memory Position Recall 153 BE Way Driver Power Seat TRO D Ed 180 To Disable A Transmitter Linked To Memory 154 Adjustable Head Restraints e pen And Close The HODd Gate ge tests n Hesiod Goto E E O aoo E 156 Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped 133 Interior Lights sioe eee 156 Man
13. If the transmission cannot be reset dealer service is required Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range P Park Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis sion The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first and then place the selector in P Park position Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range WARNING Never use Park position on an automatic transmis sion as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage 316 STARTING AND OPERATING EE e When shifting into P Park depress the button on the SSI shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure forward until it stops those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles e Look at the shift indicator window on the console to you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is ensure it is in the P Park position running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into P Park remove the key from When engaged in P Park you will not be able to move the shifter rearward without depressing the shift lever button CAUTION Before moving the shift leve
14. NOTE For lighted switches see your dealer for replace ment instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Backup Tail Stop Turn Signal amp Side Marker 0 0c 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Light LED See Note 1 Fog Light If Equipped 9145 Front Side Marker Park Turn Bulb Number Signal eceso eb n PY27 7W or 3757A Headlight Low and High Beam Halogen 24 meme REREREPPER RE PS H11 Headlight HID If Equipped Low Beami iczsiuueeaec uem XXE ne eeN D15 IN DDENERERLTTECITROCIIDORITIOR UTI 168 Note 1 CHMSL is not serviceable It is a LED lamp To replace the LED the entire CHMSL Assembly must be replaced BULB REPLACEMENT Headlights 1 Access to change the headlight bulb is from the rear of the headlight housing 2 Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb NOTE On some vehicles it may be necessary to slide the red release lock rearward and push forward on the connector while depressing the release tab 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Park Turn Signal and Side Mar
15. channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open amp close the door UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for 2 sec onds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for 2 seconds to complete the training If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLin
16. ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position Locking Door With The Key The driver s door has the only external lock cylinder You can insert the key with either side up To manually lock the door turn the key rearward to unlock the door turn the key forward See Section 7 of this manual for door Valet Key Removal lock lubrication 81bb0825 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Fob with Integrated Key and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unau thorized vehicle operation Therefore only Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut
17. sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specification Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non
18. 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPMS Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op erat
19. 36 Auto Up Power Windows 37 191 Automatic Dimming Mirror 98 en INDEX 461 Automatic Door Locks liess 33 34 Automatic Headlights 04 158 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 292 Automatic Transaxle 0 0 0 0 00 eee ee 313 Adding Fluid isis sese kenn 436 Fluid Level Check 0 0 0 00002 ce ae 436 Interlock System llle 20 314 Reset Mode 00 cece ees 314 Selection Of Lubricant 436 459 SIINE deiner Ee ER ele Cameos 314 315 Special Additives osos 438 Automatic Transmission 435 438 Adding Fluid clle be ae seres 436 438 Fluid and Filter Changes 438 Fluid Change cx cbis ere ore eae ed 438 Fluid Level Check o irer 0 0 0 0000 e eae 436 Fluid Type i2 em RR RUE S 436 459 Ball Joints sees em em my 423 Battery iteceasce s e RO ROS aC RR eee A ROS Rae 418 Gas Ca tlOD 2646 40 gea Rad Pew ea ae b 419 JUMP Starting uda sacs oe ha e d Roa es 399 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 28 Saving Feature Protection 159 D aritigs ou eu cue a cet oe x e ac ks 438 Belts DIIVe sus ke d be Rea E E 416 Belts Seat 5 ous pod que tgo ea b He 91 Body Mechanism Lubrication 424 B Pillar Location 1 2 erkese eee eee 331 Brake Assist System 0 000000 cee 176 Brake Control System Electronic 174 Brake Flo
20. All five systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari ous driving conditions are commonly referred to as ESP ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 WARNING TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of ABS Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent the the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and road conditions ABS cannot prevent accidents in stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to cluding those resulting from excessive speed in a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can spinning faster than the other the system will apply the prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS brake of the spinning wheel Thi
21. CAUTION WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the e Crossbars should remain equally spaced or paral lel at any luggage rack position for proper func tion Noncompliance could result in damage to the luggage rack cargo and or vehicle vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the Roof Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri ately Long loads which extend over the windshield UMBRELLA HOLDER such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into front and rear of the vehicle the left front door entry scuff molding Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Umbrella Holder LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM The automatic load leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and c
22. Engine Air Cleaner Filter 416 Air Conditioner Maintenance 420 Air Conditioning sss socket re 284 Air Conditioning Controls 284 Air Conditioning Filter 303 421 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 302 Air Conditioning Rear Zone 290 297 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 420 Air Conditioning System 284 292 420 Air Conditioning System Zone Control 288 Air Pressure Tires 2 0 0 0 0 0 eee 336 Airbag enis M Sb ebere tetai hies 64 71 Airbag Deployment 00000200 72 Airbag Light 4 24 0 0 a teas ete oases 64 70 75 91 229 Airbag Maintenance se ecse randas eaa ea 74 Airbag Sid 2 ase de ERE CR RS 66 70 71 Airbag Window Side Curtain 67 70 71 Alarm Light s0 25 0425 nebeegeerenere aed 229 Alarm Security Alarm llle 20 Alignment and Balance 06 343 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio lun 277 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 428 429 457 Disposal as estera rte os cal gto OR SERI PUR 430 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 174 319 Anti Lock Warning Light llus 223 Anti Theft System i see9bereiksee 3d 24 20 Appearance Cate 62sec ce s RR RR aS REOR ROS d 438 ASNT AY vases d Pa whan Vague BC Vates 197 Audio Systems Radio iilii 265 268 Auto Down Power Windows
23. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is ap
24. High Beam Light E This light shows that the headlights are on high beam Pull the turn signal lever towards the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 7 Anti Lock Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake Sys tem The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 8 Brake System Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system if equipped BRAKE The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system
25. Install the A C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C Air Filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate air flow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 8 Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box A C Air Filter Replacement 6 Remove the A C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of the housing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Front Suspension Ball Joints The front suspension ball joints
26. Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel con sumption You can expect your MPG and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E 85 fuel follow the maintenance schedule section of this manual CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability 366 STARTING AND OPERATING EE VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar If seats are removed for carrying cargo do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR Vehi
27. Steering Linkage s seyii ce ee 423 Drive Shaft Universal Joints 424 Body Lubrication 000000 424 Windshield Wiper Blades 424 Windshield And Rear Window Washers 425 Exhaust System cesena tareata ees 426 Cooling System llle 427 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 432 Fuel System Connections 432 Brakes uS Eod aed ve desi det HERE 433 Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check 434 Automatic Transaxle sess 435 Front And Rear Wheel Bearings 438 Appearance Care And Protection From COmoSlION ss gue s race gu he delia ns 438 Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cup Holders 444 H Fuses Totally Integrated Power Module 444 Bi Vehicle Storage soc cscs de dabwecaga ands 452 E Replacement Light Bulbs eee 452 M Bulb Replacement 00040 453 Headlights 0 0 0 eee eee 453 Front Park Turn Signal And Side Marker Libo 25 42 bow eS OE ewe ESOS GE x CRAS 454 Fog Lights 254 3 pae d cia renee Eee 454 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker And Backup Lights ceo ren 455 en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 456 W Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 458 License Light 40003 case e nes 456 EnPgIn snas erste dti aed Aart aie SOE gee 458 B Fluids And Capacities 12 1404s RR 457 Chassis oe hae
28. The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution After the engine has warmed operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield Mopar All Weather Windshield Washer Solution used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is
29. U L E S 8 462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 m
30. ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information including the set up of your es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 on line listening account at no additional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACCESSORY position and the radio ON press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is selected Pres
31. light removable cell phone holder tissue holder pen holder and a map holder It can be removed from the vehicle by pulling the release handle inside the 81bb8b85 1 Storage or DVD Screen 5 Storage floor console 2 Rear Climate Controls 6 Storage or DVD Screen 3 Courtesy Map Lights 7 Courtesy Map Lights 4 Storage 8 Halo Lighting es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 To remove the console use the following procedure 1 Open the console lid and remove the storage tray 2 Pull up on the release handle located inside the floor console and slide the console rearward to disengage from the floor 3 Remove the floor console To reinstall the console open the console lid and remove the storage tray Pull up on the release handle and slide the console forward to engage the front of the console into the floor tray Pivot the floor console down until it is seated on the floor tray and release the handle Pull up on 1 Removal Latch 4 Front Cupholders it io fi 2 Lower Compartment Latch 5 Top Storage Tray the console to be sure it is firmly attached apear arera Lach e ear ualde 81bb8b83 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched Rear Compartment Storage Bins Your vehicle is equipped wit
32. make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors 81b785ce 1 Driver Power Door Unlock 2 Driver Power Door Lock If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding door is open the sliding door will lock Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h If Equipped If this feature is enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicles
33. near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use Mopar Wheel Cleaner 05066247AB or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mopar or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic ca
34. vehicle reassemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism clicks at least three times 14 Stow the jack jack handle and winch handle tools 15 Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as possible Correct pressure as required E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397 Secure The Spare Tire As Follows 1 To stow the compact spare tire cover assembly on vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating assemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning freely this will allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the vehicle WARNING A loose compact spare tire cover assembly thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the com pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place provided CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 2 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the Spare Tire Hook and pull the wheel spacer from under the vehicle 3 Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is down and place the tire into the spare tire cover assem bly Slide the whee
35. you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card
36. Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized de
37. ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 OVERHEAD CONSOLES Front Overhead Consoles Two versions of the overhead console are available The base overhead console features fixed incandescent courtesy reading lamps flip down sunglass storage and conversation mirror Premium front overhead models feature a green LED focused light that illuminates the instrument panel cup holders two swiveling LED lamps flip down sunglass storage conversation mirror optional power sliding door switches and an optional power liftgate switch 81bf7b28 Front Premium Overhead Console Features 1 Instrument Panel Cupholder LED 2 Automatic Infrared Temperature Control Sensor 3 Courtesy Reading Map Lights 4 Storage Conversation Mirror Sunglass Holder 5 Optional Power Switch Bank 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Switch bank and Conversation Mirror NOTE To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats press the ON OFF button located in the overhead console to disable the switches for the rear seat passengers Courtesy Reading Lights As Equipped At the forward end of the console are two court
38. MIL to turn on due to fuel vapors escaping from the system CAUTION To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full E STARTING AND OPERATING 361 WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on NOTE e Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened e If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light may come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message e Ifthe gASCAP message is displayed in the instrument cluster this signifies a leak or change in the evapora tive system is detected Sometimes this is the result of a loosely fitting or possibly damaged filler cap Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn the gASCAP message off Make sure that the fuel fil
39. OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes or select Use Factory Settings from the EVIC and enter Yes Refer to the Customer Programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC section for more information 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in Park a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press memory button number 1 on the driver s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press memory button number 2 on the driver s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons on the drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FE
40. Obtaining Service For Your Bi Reporting Safety Defects llle 473 Vehicle iud m REESE REX ex RO 470 The Cada lm e e EE 474 Prepare For The Appointment 1 470 Bl Publication Order Forms a llli 474 Pr pare A EISES io dcs ee eere ENEA 470 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Be Reasonable With Requests 470 Quality Grades sse ee rete 476 H if You Need Assistance l l 470 Treadwear see H Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 473 Traction Grades 4 eese ce he e la Mopar Parts cies tor ce exter dta 473 Temperature Grades 470 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of prio
41. PANEL 287 Recirculation Control 81b9df17 NOTE Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illu minate when you are in recir culate mode Only use the re circulate mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather e Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e In cold or damp weather the use of the recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position e In order to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor the A C will engage automatically e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control air flow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Economy Mode If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C comp
42. Positioning System based navigation system with an ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 integrated color screen to provide maps turn identifica tion selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes A shared Hard Drive HDD for the navigation system the database and other radio features allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port While the Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the car speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include direct tune music type selections Traffic Messaging optional easy store pre sets parental lockout for VES if equipped backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instr
43. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SCAN Button CD MODE Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio to the Radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
44. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Restraining Infants And Small Children With Lock Your Vehicle 0000000 89 Set Dele Beatie Commercial Vehicles Exhaust 88 ooa esca d EUR RA eee nd 89 Suh pM EE 86 Bl Engine Break In Recommendations 88 en d Pie SO OE ae EIER Vehicl ka RR RES E an 91 a Safety Tips as croeso TER E doe Oed 89 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Transporting Passengers 0 5 89 Outside The Vehicle lesen 92 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the double sided integrated key into the igni tion switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the detented ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Fob with Integrated Key The Fob with Integrated Key operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remo
45. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and injured if the storage bins are not properly latched to the Overhead Rail System Always be sure the stor age bins are fully latched reverse feature as required by federal safety stan GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED dards This includes most garage door opener models HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door held transmitters that operate devices such as garage opener without these safety features Call toll free door openers motorized gates lighting or home security 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at systems The HomeLink unit operates off of your vehi www HomeLink com for safety information or cle s battery assistance NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not traine
46. The Steering Wheel is eric deters EP E ERR tira na 20 To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 20 Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System 20 H Security Alarm System If Equipped 20 Rearming Of The System If Equipped 21 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 10 To Arm The System cesar eonda a Eas 21 To Disarm The System 00 21 Security System Manual Override 22 Bi Illuminated Entry System If Equipped 22 lll Remote Keyless Entry If Equipped 23 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 24 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 25 Using The Panic Alarm 0 25 To Open Close Power Liftgate If Equipped 26 To Open Close Left Power Sliding Door It Equipped essersi onei phe bed eae 26 To Open Close Right Power Sliding Door If Equipped iiu cede beat ama eid Se aes 27 To Turn Off Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock t Equipped eoo td Maer data ayaa ato 27 General Information llle 28 Transmitter Battery Service 28 Remote Starting System If Equipped 29 M Door Locks ies 1 ee 31 Manual Door Locks 0000005 31 Power Door Locks If Equipped 32 la Windows 0 0 00 eee 35 Power Vent Windows If Equipped
47. YOUR VEHICLE 445 Cavity e Le Description Cavity pena ae Description J1 40 Amp Power Folding Seat J9 40 Amp u PZEV Motor Flex Green Green Fuel J2 30 Amp u Power Liftgate Mod J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash Pink ule Pink Relay Manual Tuning Ja 40 Amp m Rear Door Module Valve Green RR DOOR NODE J11 30 Amp i Power Sliding Door J4 25 Amp u Driver Door Node Pink Module Natural J13 60 Amp _ Ignition Off Draw J5 25 Amp O Passenger Door Node Yellow OD Main Natural J14 40 Amp u Rear Window Defog Je 40 Amp u Anti Lock Brake Sys Green ger Green tem ABS Pump ESP J15 30 Amp u Rear Blower 7 30 Amp ui ui Pink Pink JA7 40 Amp EE Starter Solenoid J8 40 Amp Power Memory Seat Green Green If Equipped 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cartridge Mini m Cartridge Mini m Cavity Fuse Fise Description Cavity Fuse Fuse Description J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control M3 u 20 Amp Yellow Module PCM Trans Yellow Range MA u 10 Amp Trailer Tow J19 60 Amp E Radiator Fan Red Yellow M5 u 25 Amp Inverter J20 30 Amp Front Wiper LO HI Natural Pink M6 20 Amp i J21 20 Amp E Front Rear Washer Yellow Yellow M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 J22 25 Amp E Sunroof Module Yellow BATT ACC SELECT Natural M8 u 20 Amp Front Heated Seat If M1 15 Amp Center High Mounted Yellow Equipped Blue Stop Light C
48. a egw te eck see 89 Child Restraint ssi Riu 77 79 80 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 82 Child Safety Locks sk ante aed RR ae wan 45 Chuld Seat 4 dure RUE ed 84 Clean Air Gasoline 0 cee eee 357 Cleaning Wheels nach ae ae doe acea ache de ae aah d 440 Climate Control lille 284 en INDEX 483 Clock guum 239 255 266 270 Coat Hook we sexe re 211 Coin Folder 22485 5604 o sa Ga Seas BAe Se 197 Cold Weather Operation 00 310 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 283 Compact Spare Tire 6 339 Compass 2 85 testes iuri deg Seen eg ete eating 233 235 Compass Calibration 0000 235 Compass Variance 0 eee ee eee 234 Connector UCI 2k de eae ua eres x bbSIREREPES 272 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 272 Console 2 2 v2s d m ER RR n 197 Console Floor llle 197 Console Overhead ille 181 Console Removable ss 202 208 Contract Service sees 472 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 429 Cooling System xe kc Rr EC edP e 427 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 429 Coolant Capacity a4 iva ace eae ES aed 457 Coolant Level 0 0 0 0 0c nee 427 430 Disposal of Used Coolant 430 Drain Flush and Refill 428 INSPECHON x sae ie ae veins does UR ee ks 430 Points to Remember 000005 431 Pressure Cap suche ccag
49. and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 News News Weather Weather 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a
50. brake fluid all brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure Automatic Transaxle The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are contained within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transaxle and the fluid All 4 Speed automatic transaxles are equipped with a conventional filler tube and dipstick If fluid is added it should be added through the dipstick hole in the case 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only manufacturers recommended transaxle fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important that the transaxle fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transaxle fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in trans axle shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transaxle fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check 3 8L Engine with 6 Speed Automatic Transaxle If Equipped The 6 speed automatic trans
51. cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant and to insure that coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scald ing or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the coolant in the coolant recovery b
52. colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling syst
53. contents the iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector Connecting the iPod Device Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI connector which is located in the glove box on some vehicles This location may vary with vehicle Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle system this may take a few seconds to connect the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod display and it starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 Controlling the iPod using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod9 mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod9 mode the iPod audio track if available from iPod will start playing over the vehicle audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod will be in Play mode In this Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data TUNE SCROLL Knob Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to go to the next or previous track The TUNE SCROLL knob functions similar to the scroll wheel on the iPod mobile digital device Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first 2 seconds of the track will jump to the previous track
54. dam age to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following before doing so 326 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION WARNING e Always check the depth of the standing water before e Driving through standing water limits your vehi driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not co
55. dedes 4 qoae 4 d du 459 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN 3 3L 3 8L ENGINE COMPARTMENT POWER FUSES TOTAL STEERING MB LENS OE BATTERY INTEGRATED FLUID POWER MODULE WASHER COOLANT ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL COOLANT FLUID BOTTLE PRESSURE CAP DIPSTICK FILL BOTTLE 81c421b5 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is runn
56. draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from i Z i the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause Sun Screen in the Retracted Position damage p es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen f Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top of the window Sun Screen Extended To lower the sun screen gently lift the tab upwards to disengage the hooks and feed the screen back into the Sun Screen Attaching base sill Once the screen is completely to the top of the window extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks attached to the top of the window 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CONVENIENCE TRAY DRAWER AND CUP HOLDERS There are 9 cupholders in the interior Two cup holders in the center front instrument panel four in the floor consoles and 3 located in the third row quarter trim panel Instrument Panel Cup Holders The instru
57. engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL Brake Transmission Interlock System into any forward gear when the engine is above This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out idle speed of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot pressed This system is active only while the ignition is firmly on the brake pedal switch is in the ON position Always press the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of PARK 314 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for the interlock system In order to override this system remove the cover located to the top right of the selector lever in the instrument panel The override can be activated b y pressing the white colored tab which can be accessed through the hole in the instrument panel While the override is pressed the shift lever can be moved out of the park position without pressing the brake After operation return the cover to its original position This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the OFF or ON positions NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap
58. internal components es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the eject button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection
59. is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for A C Air Filter service intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C Air Filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter 1 Open the glove box and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the door 3 Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot on the side of the box This is done by grasping the dampener connector on the outside of the box and the end of the connector pin on the inside of the box with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand Once disconnected the dampener will retract under neath the instrument panel if you release it 4 Pivot the glove box downward 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE 5 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter 7
60. is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result For additional information on TPMS refer to Section 5 Starting and Operating Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys tem of this manual 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE For additional information on Tire Pressures refer to Section 5 Starting and Operating Tire Inflation Pressures of this manual 26 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined ESP with BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning BAS Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible 27 CMTC Reset Button Press the reset button to scroll through sub menus i e Trip Functions AVG Fuel Economy DTE Elapsed Time and Units NOTE For more detailed operation refer to Compass Mini Trip Computer later in this section 28 Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC If Equippe
61. is seated in the rear floor bracket Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee STORAGE Glove Compartments There are both upper and lower glove compartments To open the upper compartment 1 press in on the latch 2 To open the lower compartment 4 pull out on the release handle 3 The lower compartment is equipped with a lock 3 81bb8b87 1 Lower Compartment 3 Upper Latch 2 Lower Latch and Lock 4 Upper Compartment es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Door Trim Panel Storage Sliding Side Door Bottle Holder Both sliding doors have a bottle holder molded right into the trim Front Door Storage Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for storage Sliding Door Bottle Holder 81bd5af1 1 Rear Map Pocket 3 Bottle Holder 2 Storage Pocket 4 Front Map Pocket 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Driver Seat Back Storage If Equipped Second Row Seat Storage bins If Equipped The Driver s Seat Back has a Primary Storage Pocket on The Seat Storage Bins are located on the floor in front of all models and an optional Secondary Mesh Pocket the second row seats the area below the covers can be used for stora
62. left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for
63. level is controlled by the driver s seat position as well as impact severity Use of special inflators result in a very compact driver s side airbag 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee In addition to the small size the inflating gasses exit through strategically placed vents which direct the gas away from the occupant Front Passenger Airbag Special Features A new active venting front passenger airbag is designed to reduce the risk of occupants who may be out of position by the use of active vents positioned on each side of the airbag Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Thorax Side Airbags If Equipped Front seat mounted side Thorax airbags provide en hanced protection and work together with supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to help protect an occupant during a side impact The seat mounted side airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the seat 819b6e91 Seat mounted Side Airbag Label When the bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each bag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left bag only and a right side impact deploys only the right bag ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC Airbags offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body st
64. manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner manual D OO X WATER IN FUEL REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE AS Xx j i Q7 t FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH ets oes mp Et t 4 ND n FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT WASHER FLUID LEVEL WINOSHIELO ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS DEFROST HEATED BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION PN GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG STEERING FLUID AND WASHER C b E AIRBAG we MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAIN
65. must be opened or closed manually ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 SEAT STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING WARNING WARNING Always close the storage bin covers when your ve hicle is unattended Do not allow children to have In an accident serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched e Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin cover open access to the 2nd row seat storage bins Once in the storage bin young children may not be able to escape If trapped in the storage bin children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Keep the storage bin cover closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not operate the storage bin cover while the vehicle is in motion Do not use the storage bin latch as a tie down 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION The storage bin cover must lay flat and latched to avoid being gouged by the front seat track which has minimal clearance Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release As a security measure a Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release strap is built into the storage bin cover latching mechanism Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Strap NOTE In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the glow in the dark strap attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STAR
66. never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur
67. on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability es STARTING AND OPERATING 343 WARNING CAUTION e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Replacing original tires with tires of a different size that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen Alignment And Balance sion components You could lose control and have Poor suspension alignment may result in 5 an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings e Fast tire wear approved for your vehicle may result in false speedometer and odometer readings e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided Never use a tire with a smaller load index or wear capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load e Vehicle pull to right or left index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Tires may also Cause the vehicle to
68. party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the in struction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order fr
69. play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu If Equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between gt ll playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button If Equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc If Equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc If Equipped e Angle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc If Equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF If Equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls If Equipped e VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the Audio Select button If Equipped 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults S
70. pry the wheel cover off Then pull the wheel off the hub 8 Install the compact spare tire Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered NOTE Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers 6e 9 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 10 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station 396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN 11 Lower the jack to its fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 12 Place the deflated flat tire and compact spare tire cover assembly in the rear cargo area have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible WARNING A loose deflated flat tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 13 Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
71. rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with window bags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Light en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Driver Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Front and Side Impact Sensors Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Seat Belt Reminder Light Knee Impact Bolster Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioners Front Seat Track Position Sensors Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC If Equipped Front Seat side mounted Thorax Airbags If Equipped Front Seat Airbag Features The front airbag system has dual stage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appro priate to the level of crash severity as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC and the impact sensors at the front of the car The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the second stage is expended later in the crash event Driver Airbag Special Features Driver airbag deployment and force
72. requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 68 kg 150 Ibs allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR EN STARTING AND OPERATING 371 WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A da
73. seat belts your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems NOTE The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap Shoulder Belts The b
74. smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Power Folding Outside Mirrors If Equipped Press the power fold button to fold in the mirrors Press the button again to unfold the mirrors Power Folding Mirror Switch Both mirrors will always move together and will fold anytime the button is pressed The ignition switch does not have to be in the ON position es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Power Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped Use the mirror select switch located on the driver door trim panel to adjust the view obtained in the outside mirrors Press the switch to the L or R for Left or Right mirror selection Press the mirror select switch again to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position The mirror selection will also automatically change to neutral after 30 seconds 81bb6db9 Power Side Mirror Adjust 1 Left Power Side Mirror If Equipped 2 Right Power Side Mirror If Equippe
75. sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past approxi mately 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e the clicking sound of solenoid valves e brake pedal pulsations e and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer 322 STARTING AND OPERATING EE TRACTION CONTROL TCS IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven whe
76. speed exceeds 15 mph This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the following procedure e On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings in the EVIC section of this manual e On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the LOCK direction 6 Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If necessary repeat the above procedure The Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h feature can be reactivated by repeating the above men tioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit If Equippe
77. supplied with the intermittent feature only ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 4 Headlamp Control Features When the Headlights are turned on pushing the lever assembly toward the WARNING dash will switch from low beams to high beams Pulling Sudden Joss Gf visibility Hugugh Me windshield back to the neutral position returns to low beam head could lead to an accident You eight not see other lights vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your the windshield during freezing weather warm the headlights by lightly pulling the Multifunction Lever windshield with defroster before and during wind toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at shield washer use high beam and remain on until the lever is released 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED To tilt the column pull the small lever located behind the turn signal control toward you and move the wheel up or down as desired Release the lever to lock the wheel firmly in place WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving Tilt Steering Column Control REAR PARK SENSE SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system i
78. test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 477 WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 480 INDEX ae Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze Adding Fuel Adding Washer Fluid 0000 425 Additives Fuel Adjustable Pedals Air Cleaner Engine
79. that comfort level automatically 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Customer Programmable Features in Section 3 of this manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the front ATC display until the engine warms up The fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is selected or by rotating the blower control to any fixed blower speed Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually the remaining features will continue to operate automati cally The left blower control knob can be set to any fixed blower speed by pressing the upper f
80. the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
81. the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Automatic Transmission The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles Reset Mode Electronic Transmission The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transmission automatically shifts into sec ond gear The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected Park P Reverse R and Neutral N will continue to operate This Reset ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the transmission In the event that the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears e Stop the vehicle and shift into Park P e Turn the key to OFF then restart the engine e Shift into the desired range and resume driving NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your dealer has diagnostic equip ment to determine if the problem could recur
82. the drive belt with a new drive belt NOTE The belt must be routed correctly to ensure proper drive function Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata lytic converter For proper type of replacement spark plugs refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct spark plug type Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for engine air cleaner filter maintenance inter vals NOTE Be sure to follow the dusty or off road condi tions maintenance interval if applicable WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 Catalytic Converter The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emission control de
83. the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscrip tion SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second channel to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push button memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6
84. the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds when ignition is off Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SALES CODE REN MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN multimedia system contains a radio CD DVD player USB port a 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD and a JukeBox virtual CD changer Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 inch touch screen allows for easy menu selection A 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port While th
85. third time for No Heat no lights 81bd1653 Second row heated seat switches are located in the amp ibbaded liding door handle trim panels and function the same as gt 5 ste E penes SEG 1 Heated Seat 4 Door Handle front switches 2 Power Window 5 Power Door 3 Manual Lock es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 seatback to its normal position Using body pressure lean WARNING forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin has latched because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of the seat To recline lean forward slightly lift the lever Manual Reclining Seat Control then push back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the 81bd164a 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you cou
86. tion to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a DaimlerChrysler Corporation product 3 4 Requested by police under a legal warrant Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable light status if equipped lime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seatbelt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 e Engine control status including engine speed e Transmission gear selection e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire pressure monitoring system status If Equipped Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a
87. to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389 Jacking Instructions WARNING Preparations For Jacking WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo 6 site the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear Only use the jack in the positions indicated NBLC wheel Always park on a firm level surface before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If worki adway be extremely careful of motor m Bid eee i e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are se
88. to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phone book entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phone book with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Phonebook Download UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the Phone button and say Phonebook Download Sys tem prompts Ready to accept vcard entry via Blue tooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX trans fers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the
89. to the left es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 12 inches 30 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS All of the lights except the hazard warning lights headlamp high beams and flash to pass are controlled by switches to the left of the steering column on the instru ment panel 81bc4a9b Headlight Switch Assembly Interior Lights Interior lights are turned on when a door or liftgate is opened the keyless entry transmitter is activated or when the dimmer control is moved to the extreme top The interior lights will automatically turn off in about 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds every activation thereafter until the engine is started if one of the following occur e A door sliding door or the liftgate is left open e Any overhead reading light is left on e If the dimmer control is in the extreme top position NOTE The key mu
90. use ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat with the seat adjusted to the rear most position Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm Tether Installation For Commercial Vehicles With Rear Seat Delete To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the vehicle follow the instructions shown 1 Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat 2 Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the extended tether strap 3 Route the tether strap over the head rest Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is centered on the head rest 4 Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether strap attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat 5 Following the child seat manufacturer s instructions tighten the child restraint tether strap 6 Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks abrasions discoloration and loose threads If these or any other condition that might effect the performance of the strap is observed DO NOT USE Contact your local DaimlerChrysler dealership for a replacement part 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used w
91. warmer air from the floor outlets Headliner Mode 7 Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vane knob on the outlets to one side will shut off the air flow Rear Economy Mode If rear economy mode is desired set the blower knob on the front control unit to the RR position Turn the A C button OFF and select any mode except MIX or DE FROST The rear temperature knob and the rear blower speed can be adjusted as desired by the second seat occupants Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped e Three Zone ATC allows both the driver and front occupant and rear seat occupants to select individual comfort settings es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 e Occupants in the vehicle select AUTO mode operation and a comfort temperature setting using rotary knobs on the control unit e The system provides set and forget operation for op timum comfort and convenience e The system can be controlled manually if desired e SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones allowing one comfort setting for the cabin if desired The Infrared Three Zone Automatic Temperature Control ATC System automatically maintains the interior com fort level desired by the driver and all passengers This is Front Top Panel ATC 81bc4f86 accomplished by an infrared sensor located in the for 1 Left Front Temp
92. wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off depending upon the acces sory delay setting Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate C LOAD 6 DISC MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT TUNE SCROLL 8189f6f9 REQ Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the
93. with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle 360 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap As a reminder a fuel icon with an arrow lt indicating which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located on is located in the instrument cluster just below the Fuel Gage The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle NOTE The driver s side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light
94. you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 MIN OIL MARK MAX OIL MARK 809744ab Engine Oil Dipstick CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling
95. 0 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPMS Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the TPMS Light will still be ON In this situation the TPMS Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value 348 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent mois ture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPMS SENSOR NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting yo
96. 0000 415 OiLSelecti n a e i salei t hee eds 414 457 Oil Synthetic 4i s me sa estasi 415 Operation ev seas ue ERE WU oet d 88 Overheating igsewextedchune e s Ene dead 387 Star hg sisse ke es RE Eee 309 Temperature Gauge secsec 6 eee eee 222 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 72 Event Data Recorder 00 0000000 75 Exhaust Gas Caution 50 89 90 359 426 Exhaust System 9 3 2 5 ede ad E pns 89 426 Extender Seat Belt llle 63 Exterior Folding Mirrors cedis eserse hassa 100 Exterior Lights agus ai hoe der Ase Rae es 92 Fabrics Care sc ssec a ce Kae a ae 441 442 Filler Location Fuel PERMET 222 INE 486 INDEX ae Filters Aur Cleaner ied e en bae CIAO e 416 Air Conditioning 0000 303 421 Engine Oil amp ieslsece name ee dae 415 458 Engine Oil Disposal 200 415 Flashers Hazard Warning 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 386 Turn Signal sos eceae cian cannes 92 223 454 455 Flash To Pass prasuno ces rangri ee es 165 Flat Tire Stowage sa sate ie cee eee 396 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising RANPE esee gadni ee 365 Engine Oil bisa pine reme E e dds 364 Fuel Requirements 0 362 363 Maintenance se eue x romaa E eR Ease Ed 365 Replacement Parts 00004 365 Staring uid edd xo re ak abrite doe ae 365 Flooded Engine Starting llle 311 Floor Console 2 0 0 00 cee ees 197 Fluid Capacities sm Saws eee R
97. 11 FOSES coe dose Rar Dore Evo he Deut u a hence ERR t 432 lpr tton x sace doe RR RR c Roe S RR RO Ro RR 15 KEY ope da Anb ea e e no oe A CR ees 13 15 Ignition Key Removal aaien 15 Illuminated Entry 02 0000 eee eee 22 Immobilizer Sentry Key 0 0 17 Infant Restraint eax paee ak 00 000 cee aes 78 79 Inside Rearview Mirror essen 98 Instrument Cluster Less 220 221 222 Instrument Panel and Controls 219 Instrument Panel Cover lisse 441 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 443 Integrated Power Module Fuses 444 Interior Appearance Care 00000 441 Interior Lights cere 156 157 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 164 Introduction iesu bea Hardee t e mener As be 4 Jack Location s ax Reo voe Me am we ei 390 391 Jack Operation cese eere Rx 388 391 en INDEX 469 Jacking Instructions 000 391 J mptar ng ixie e ee eese e eyes 399 Key Programming eese 18 Key Replacement 0 000000 cee 18 Key Sentry Immobilizer 17 Key In Reminder 0 0 00 0000 16 Keyless Entry System 0 0 0 00000000 23 Keys ahi nits adu cd alain gd dor ined Gate aedes 13 Knee Bolster sas cue ci me RRYeesergcaujdn 65 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 000000 55 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for Children 2 i605 9534054663455 088e34 35 82 A
98. 265 268 Universal Transmitter 020005 184 Unleaded Gasoline llli 355 Upholstery Cate xe eee kp ede lt 5 441 USB Pott 32a ice e we eae UR On 08 265 268 Vanity Marron 1208499 a Sil AUR dee RR OR d 102 Variance Compass lllleeeess 234 Vehicle Certification Label llus 366 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 005 332 366 368 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage sss cv sdk en 301 452 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System s es dee m e e P eee EE 280 Warning Flasher Hazard 0 386 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description a cte bioese eg e E en 222 Warnings and Cautions spat irents pana 6 Warranty Information 000 473 Washer Adding Fluid 00 425 Washing Vehicle cr re eS 439 en INDEX 499 Water Driving Through i yes 325 Wheel Alignment and Balance 343 Wheel and Wheel Trim 0005 440 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 440 Wheel Bearings imei Rr Rye 438 Wind Buffeting 000000 40 191 Window Fogging 0 eee 301 Windows asses ed ex va Kacy Pema Sd ewe PREX 35 POWER 1 eee SA IR Y UEM dA EM 36 Rear Vent i222 x9 ec BERE YER 35 Windshield Defroster llle 91 Windshield Washers less 163 425 Windshield Wiper Blades LL
99. 31 Tire Identification Number TIN 330 Tire Markings 222 19 eR RR Ee 327 Tire Safety Information 6 327 Tir gece dave ee EEEE EE EYES 92 335 476 Aging Life of Tires isle 341 Aur Pressure 22m a Ri eee Ris Rhee 4 335 Alignment cere voor aa sie eee hase a Ge 343 Chais 4 ad04 64 0004 428 sce ecb Ea ha ons es 344 Changing occ ee eis d a dew da ae Pi dade hued 388 Compact Spare cess eR QOO RR ER a 339 Flat Changing 3 grex ex eee doe ete ed 396 General Information illl 335 High Speed is 26346 be hae das 338 Inflation Pressures 0 0 eee eee 336 Jacking s 9 3s E rn ee oet Gs at 388 389 en INDEX 497 Life of Tires iunooanexee xo Us RE TR go dO RS 341 Load Capacity 5 22 ees 331 332 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 346 Quality Grading 0 000000 476 Radial i239 ae ead eh taeda PREETS CEA 338 Replacement ue ce eee emet en 342 Rotati n uu aerer Rava besa waa eee Ges 345 Safety sss dee ee be RAE ed ores 327 335 DOIZOS icc dee ka HRP ORES LAUR ea 328 Snow Tires iae die ae a eee eee eee 345 Spare TIe 20555 beg ase cal end td 390 SPINNING il2see4es Re Here exe E dense 340 Tread Wear Indicators llle 341 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 377 TOWING cec Ba ote ege don BIS a dd 369 Disabled Vehicle llle 402 Guide 4 22 945P55bkefej4eeTessshidbeq4 374 Recreational eese 384 403 TON T TRUTH 374 Tr
100. 35 Power Windows esee 36 H Sliding Side Door 2 m 41 Sliding Door Open Flash 42 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Power Sliding Door If Equipped 42 Seat Belt Pretensioners llle 61 Power Sliding Door Master Lock Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System It Equipped zerge kestane tee RE aie ders 44 BeltAlert9 aerer trs e Exe E ER Child Protection Door Lock 45 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women aiii a ocu aro KES 49 OSES Ra E 47 Seat Belt Extender i434 aa or E ads 63 Power Liftgate If Equipped 48 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag 64 H Seat Storage Bin Safety Warning 51 Airbag System Components 64 Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release 52 Front Seat Airbag Features lesus 65 Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 70 Release soceri sce a kx a e aes nas 53 Event Dati Reorder THOR seriaro 22222022 75 ll Occupant Restraints 1s ook e 54 Child Restraint L L nage acta deans 77 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 000 55 lll Rear Seat Delete Feature Commercial Vehicles Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode Only If Equipped 04 85 It Equipped 5 3 ere EE eR 61 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
101. 424 Windshield Wipers 0000000 163 Wiper Blade Replacement 424 Wipers Intermittent 0000000 164 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 442 Zone Control Temperature Control 288 ooocr KaMe Stick with the Specialists DaimlerChrysler Corporation AR 81 226 0819 First Edition Printed in U S A
102. 5 seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and release When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or by turning the ignition switch to the ON position 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system To Open Close Power Liftgate If Equipped Press the LIFTGATE button twice within five seconds to open close the power liftgate The liftgate will beep for 2 seconds and then open close If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power closed the liftgate will reverse to the full open position If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate pressing the button twice will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing
103. 62 Electric Remote Mirrors 0005 101 Electrical Power Outlets 06 192 Electronic Brake Control System 174 Anti Lock Brake System 00 174 Brake Assist System 00 0004 176 Electronic Roll Mitigation 177 Electronic Stability Program 178 Traction Control System 200 175 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 177 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 171 Electronic Stability Program ESP 178 en INDEX 485 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher 386 Jacking aem re eR ai pr ea RC ae 388 389 Jump Starting sercar iinit ti pahina eea 399 Overheaune siesta chek Hebe ESES 387 Emission Control System Maintenance 410 462 Engine 2 222 999 e ey tue Rr e 88 408 Air Cleaner 42 2 br be ex E eR ed es 416 Block Heater i i RR REG DA 312 Break In Recommendations 88 Checking Oil Level 00000 413 Compartment 0 0 6 eee 408 Coolant Antifreeze 00 00 0000 458 Cooling as ec ese ee kb RR ae aes eee 427 Exhaust Gas Caution 50 89 359 Flooded Starting cestero tecie mm ees 311 Fuel Requirements 04 355 457 Ol css eh tas ER wae ee 413 457 458 Oil Change Interval 0000 414 Gil Disposal esc s IR RO RR 415 Oil Fillet Cape eres te d eere Em 414 Oil Filter Disposal 0
104. 7 Gauges Coolant Temperature osses eseas emea eiiam 222 Fuel 2s csse enu uyt iq tore ded ioa ERE 222 Speedomet r i i2bss o eR xe Red 223 lachomet t i mk e m ke 225 Gearshift 2 ss csse pete Rex es 314 315 General Information 19 28 129 355 Glass Cleaning isses ep me TEES ER 443 Grocery Bag Retainer 005 151 Gross Axle Weight Rating 366 370 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 366 370 Hands Free Phone UConnect 102 268 269 Hard Drive HDD 265 268 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Wate cs sos perta re pene rn 325 Hazard Warning Flasher 386 Head Restraints os ere reseg iiaa roedi i ares 131 HO 488 INDEX aa Headlights soccer nue recs Ree qox Rs 157 Bulb Replacement 0004 453 Cleaning aiciis Bars aod aiatt pagnia ara tea 442 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 163 165 Lights On Reminder sss 159 PASSING succus spe ERR o ee eR cn 165 Replacing essees pero ds tiec E iad 453 Time Delay ursi t RbnSP RE OR RE 160 Heated Seats ssim dd ccs beue red oes 132 bieater sodium oe RE C Re P eee RD Cd 284 Heater Engine Block 000000 312 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 165 Hitches Trailer Towing HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 184 Hood Release eee 154 Hook Coat 3334 4933 94 04 d PUE geb dor DA 2
105. 74 Map Reading Lights 040 182 Memory Feature Memory Seat 151 Memory Seat llle 102 151 Mini Trip Computter 2 62 00 os eg 9 caer es 233 IMITTOIS ici beares Eder y d RCM doen ee ees 98 Automatic Dimming ecese iea suster tess 98 El cttic Remote curse ere t dene Ier 101 Exterior Folding sece reteset bie heed 100 Heated edd te eee ee eee 102 MemoOty s cu ton ek eke Bil oe ete a es 151 Outside escuadra acean aoi ona dud NUS 99 RearvieWw ae ee eR RES RIO YS 98 MaDIty fone nd Re de ee ERA edere depo ed 102 Modifications Alterations Vehicle Z Monitor Tire Pressure System 346 Mopar Parts suc IRSE Roe ee ee kare 412 473 MP3 Play t ee du s m e neg eee a 265 268 Multi Function Control Lever 162 Navigation Radio a c cee 268 Navigation System 0 0 0 0 0 00 eee 268 New Vehicle Break In Period LL 88 Occupant Restraints 00005 54 70 72 Occupant Restraints Sedan 66 67 70 71 Odometer llle 225 Oil Change Indicator 422i siasii 226 Oil Change Indicator Reset 226 Oil Engine MM ERE 413 458 INN 492 INDEX BEEN Capacity ce acea e a eh RO RR OC RUR RR 457 Change Interval esc erar e re ws 414 CHECKING wenns Wk Soe qas rari 413 Disposal amp iekeseeseerbehestede eR nen gate 415 Filter 2 22 99 e M Rx x AS 415 458 Filter Disposal
106. 81bbe8f6 Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes To cancel remote start press the REMOTE START button once To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLOCK button on the key fob After the vehicle is unlocked you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle insert the key in the Ignition and move it to the RUN position otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and auto matically turn off Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed The transmission is moved out of park Pressing the brake pedal ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the remote start sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting After either of these conditions or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition and moving it to the RUN position then back to LOCK DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Lock the doors by pushing down on the lock plungers on each door trim panel If the lock plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore
107. 89 SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Lock Your Vehicle Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended even in your own driveway or garage Try to park your vehicle in a well lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of value exposed Exhaust Gas Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust WARNING system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com pl
108. A 7 Node CCN Transfer Me _ mu ah Eu Case Switch T CASE PRK RUN LMP SW RUN ST Multi Function Control M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down Natural ASD 1 and 2 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 Cavity e E Description Cavity Cartridge 1 Description M20 15 Amp Cabin Compartment M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump FUEL Blue Node Interior Light Yellow PUMP Diesel Lift m CCN INT LIGHT Pump DSL LIFT Switch Bank SW PUMP Export BANK Steering Con Only trol Module SCM M26 10 Amp Power Mirror Switch M21 u 20 Amp Auto Shut Down Red PWR MIRR SW Yellow ASD 3 Driver Window M22 l10Amp Right Horn RT Switch DRVR WIND Red HORN HI LOW SW M23 10 Amp Left Horn LT HORN M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch IGN eH Red HI LOW Red SW Window Module M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper REAR WIN MOD zz Natural WIPER M28 10 Amp Next Generation Con Red troller NGC Trans mission Feed TRANS FEED J1962 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Cartridge Mini Cartridge Mini Powertrain Engine Controller GPEC Cavity Fuse puse Description Cavity Fuse Fuse Description M29 _ 10 Amp Occupant Classifica M34 10 Amp Park Assist PRK Red tion Module OCM Red ASST Heater Venti M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module lation Air Condition m Blue RR WIPER MOD ing Module HVAC Power Folding Mir
109. A Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX au
110. AC current This outlet can be used to power small appliances and electronics Press the switch located in the center stack switch bank to turn the power on to the outlet Press the switch again to turn the power off NOTE When the Inverter Switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately 1 second before the inverter status indicator turns ON The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is produc ing AC power NOTE Due to build in overload protection the inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded WARNING To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a 3 Prong Adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off SUN SCREENS IF EQUIPPED Sun Screens are available for 2nd and 3rd Row Seating CAUTION Windows The screens store in the sill trim panels and the e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e Sun Screen attaches to when pulled out cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that
111. ATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Disable A Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 2 Press and release memory button number 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to step 3 3 Press and release the memory SET S button located on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling that you are in the memory set mode 4 Within 5 seconds press and release memory button 1 on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling to you that the driver memory has been set 5 Within 5 seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter A chime will sound signaling to you that the transmitter link has been successfully disabled To disable another transmitter linked to either memory position repeat steps 1 5 for each transmitter NOTE Once programmed all transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to the Remote Linked to Memory Customer Pro grammable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC for more information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released First pull the hood release lever located on the instrument panel below the steering column Next go to the front of the vehicle and look inside the center of the hood opening Push the safety catch lever
112. Automatic Transmission ls 310 Cold Weather 0 2 00000 aira citt iiia 310 Engine Fails to Start 000000 311 Remote i6 ee ec RE HU Rer v3 OS 29 Starting and Operating 0 309 Starting Procedures sisse ee rs 309 Steering Column Controls 0 0 00 00 ce eee 162 WINK AGC Em 423 POWER eo 14 dd PCS SAGES SSS ee 323 423 Shaft Seal 4 su wa Maen ee ee 423 Tilt Column 225 vue mene race kevin 166 INN 496 INDEX EE Wheel Lock esca eee he Wao ae ae E aas 20 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System COontrolS swish wie S dran a SEK wee d era ER ee xe 282 SIOTage oe adie eds ehe guage bodies 204 452 Storage BIN 2 guns Oe cing oa cs cista 204 Storage Vehicle cis say oe adage coe 301 452 Storing Your Vehicle osses racers sata serris 452 Stow n Go Fold in Floor Seats 135 Sun Roof oss a REESE CUP ROR SO EES 190 Sunglasses Storage a E eee 183 Sunroof Maintenance llle 191 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 64 Synthetic Engine Oil 6 415 System Navigation lille 268 System Remote Starting 00 29 Tachometer lt i 0406605 petisse o Rr Re 225 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 292 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant Tether Anchor Child Restraint 82 Tilt Steering Column 1 220 Yee e Res 166 Tip Start cea hare de Ka iced aD ert dg 15 Tire and Loading Information Placard 3
113. BEBE Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ib 100 Ibs 80 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handlin
114. BIK To unlock the doors and liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door side of the vehicle or twice to unlock all doors and liftgate The illuminated entry system also turns on Remote Key Unlock This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter The Remote Key Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Press the UNLOCK button for 5 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pressed after 5 sec onds press the LOCK button Release both buttons ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 The Remote Key Unlock feature can be reactivated by repeating the above mentioned procedure or by perform ing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped To lock the doors and liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate The horn will chirp once to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the transmitter If desired the Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock feature can be turned on and off by performing the following procedure 1 Press the LOCK button for 5 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after
115. Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while battery is in vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Air Conditioner Maintenance 7 WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system performance check Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant
116. Connect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the Phone button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two procedures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for 5 seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR For best performance adjust the rear view mirror to provide at least 2 inch 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away f
117. E The power sliding door must be unlocked before the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door will operate en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 81bb8d d 1 Heated Seat Switch 2 Window Switch 3 Lock Lever 4 Door Handle 5 Door Switch If the inside or outside door handles are used while the power sliding door is activated the power sliding door feature will be canceled and the door must be opened or closed manually To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats press the Power Sliding Door Master Lock button located in the overhead console to disable the switches for the rear seat passengers NOTE e If anything obstructs the power sliding door while it is closing or opening the door will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance e The driver s side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door e Ifthe power sliding door is not in the full open or close position it will fully open when a power sliding door switch is pressed To close the door wait until it is fully open and then press the switch again 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e The power sliding door switches will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle s
118. EL ME Manual Air Conditioning And Heating SYSTEM ue dete dx Pate sai deo e ares Manual Rear Zone Climate Control lf Equipped eoe EEREV Automatic Temperature Control ATC It Equipped 42e eme ited cameras 292 Bl Electric Rear Window Defroster If Equipped rist eres meme 303 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 INSTRUMENT PANELS AND CONTROLS 81bb7b60 1 Air Vent 5 Cubby 9 Cubby or DVD System 13 Hazard Switch Panel 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Upper Glove Compartment 10 Pull out cup holder 14 Wireless Ignition Node 3 Transmission Shifter 7 Lower Glove Compartment 11 Storage Cubby 15 Dimmer Switch 4 Radio 8 Climate Controls 12 Power Supply 12 Volt 16 Head Light Switch 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER P R N DJ E CHangE OIL Haase 8 81c6ddbd UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Hea ee 81c6ddc8 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Fuel Door Reminder This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is EU located on the left side of the vehicle 3 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temp
119. ES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 WARNING ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has 2 available operating modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for ESP on 2WD vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most all driving situations ESP should only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch located in the center stack lower switch bank just above the radio When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP psp except for the limited slip feature de OFF scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally all
120. G YOUR VEHICLE 23 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate and activate the panic alarm optional power liftgate left power sliding door and right power sliding door from distances up to about 23 feet 7 meters using a hand held radio transmitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE If the FOBIK is in the ignition switch then all buttons on that transmitter will be disabled The buttons on the remaining transmitters will work If the vehicle is shifted out of PARK all the transmitter buttons are disabled for all keys Two 2 transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle Vehicles built without the powered options will be equipped from the factory with three button transmitters and those built with power options will be equipped with up to 7 button transmitters Three button transmitters will provide basic UNLOCK LOCK and PANIC functions 81bb182d 3 Button FOBIK Seven button transmitters will provide functions that allow the same basic operation as the three button but may also be used to Open Close the optional power liftgate left power sliding door or right power sliding 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee door Other options of the system allow you to turn ON OFF the Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock Re mote Key Unlock and Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock features 81bb182e 7 Button FO
121. HMSL M9 __ 20Amp Rear Heated Seat If Loo Brake Switch Yellow _ Equipped M2 _ 20Amp Trailer Lighting Yellow es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 Cavity e Le Description Cavity E es 1 Description M10 20Amp Ignition Off Draw M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Yellow Vehicle Entertainment Yellow Cabin Compartment System IOD VES Node IOD CCN Satellite Digital Audio Wireless Control Receiver SDARS Module WCM SI DVD Hands Free REN Clock Module Module HFM Uni CLK MOD Multi versal Garage Door Function Control Opener UGDO Van Switch MULTIFCTN ity Lamp VANITY SW LP M14 20Amp Trailer Tow Export M11 10 Amp Ignition Off Draw ZZ Yellow Only Red IOD HVAC ATC MW SENSR Under hood Lamp UH LMP M12 30 Amp Amplifier AMP 7 Green 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cartridge Mini Cartridge Mini Switch MULTIFTCN SW Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Glow Plug Module GLW PLG MOD Export Diesel Only Cavity Fuse Fuse Description Cavity Fuse Fuse Description M15 20 Amp COL MOD IR SNS M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Yellow Heater Ventilation u Red Controller Occupant Air Conditioning Classification Module Automatic Tempera ORC OCM ture Control HVAC M17 15 Amp Left Tail License ATC Rear View Blue Park Lamp LT TAIL ein i VW MIR LIC PRK LMP abin Compartment
122. Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 ll Universal Consumer Interface UCI It Equipped x 5 ases deae do e Ue Roe 272 Connecting The iPod Device 272 Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons 273 Play Mode uo ese Sasa eme eae 273 List Or Browse Mode Ls 275 li Satellite Radio RSC If Equipped REN RER And RES Radios Only se seresesise tes sass 276 System Activation cles 276 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID 0 0 0 277 Selecting Satellite Mode 277 Satellite Antenna lees 277 Reception Quality vie em es 278 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 278 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped lll Video Entertainment System VES lt Equipped ese vay ee bere REPRE ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 282 Radio Operation 5 2 3 243d or Res 283 CD Player zucca eee RR e xa 283 ll CD DVD Disc Maintenance 283 Bl Climate Controls liliis 284 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PAN
123. ISE 22v RES RES Cruise Control On OOF cs ne ux RES EN CER y Kass Door Ajar ESPOR Lucero Rs e eG aes ESP Off SATE sce eV aga ww Erepeta EA Lift Gate Ajar BASCAP ood deg eee es hee S Fuel Cap Fault NOFUSE sea pese preria ea EG Fuse Fault LoCOOL 3 g 4 5 e443 cede eee AS Low Coolant LoWASH 4 Low Washer Fluid CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the fol lowing procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this p
124. Key If the steering wheel is moved no more than 1 2 turn in either direction and the FOBIK is not in the ignition switch the steering wheel will lock If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel With the engine running turn the steering wheel upside down turn off the engine and remove FOB Integrated Key Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock engages To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Insert the FOB Integrated Key in the ignition switch and start the engine If the key is difficult to turn move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON RUN positions and the brake pedal is depressed SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals For the first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights and security telltale will flash repeatedly For an addi tional 15 minutes only the headlights and secu
125. LCS ge zu ee ance Se cee ema p ew d eqs 92 Info PDC TTL 154 Lead Free Gasoline cece eee 355 Leaks Fluid ius esce doe Rx 92 Eife Of Tires 2493 uox Se eae aa OP e eS 341 LAS Ate pe 47 Light Bulbs lt s eere eh RES 92 Lights 233 REA ERE ORA TR RU tasas 92 156 AUDAS ccr ed bake e Ne He doe tees 64 70 75 91 229 Alarm 22acs aem 9 e ek LY EG 229 Antclock 2e ues YE pee ERU enhn eg 223 Automatic Headlights llle 158 Back Up ies nea bees hee AS ERE DR 455 Battery Saver 2 6 6 eee eee eee 159 Brake Assist Warning 0 180 Brake Warning uus scr pera d EXE e ens 224 Bulb Replacement 452 453 Center Mounted Stop lille 456 Dimmer Switch Headlight 157 165 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 178 Engine Temperature Warning 228 EXtQHO a ee raraos Pea e eid be eg ea po 92 FOS c e mache CR Roe FOR Ra 160 228 454 Hazard Warning Flasher MERE KA 386 HO 490 INDEX EE Headlight Switch lille 157 Headlights ss tec reet Pala OA enu e 453 Headlights On Reminder ls 159 High Beam 1 6 eee 165 High Beam Indicator 200 223 High Beam Low Beam Select 163 165 Illuminated Entry 0 0 00 000000 22 lrteflOB ua eae Vin eee dd nara d wale ees 156 157 IMIGONSE socks oum oo eat Pe pae aed 456 Lights On Reminder sss 159 Low Fuel ccc eee y
126. Link earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with PRO GRAMMING HOMELINK Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for Rolling Code e Did you unplug the de
127. Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric 44 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cup Holders Removal Pull the flexible liner from the cup holder drawer starting at one edge to ease removal Cleaning Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately hour After 2 hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth Installation Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the corresponding openings in the drawer FUSES TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that identifies each component may be printed or embossed on the inside of the cover ee MAINTAINING
128. ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 O clock positions The right hand rocker switch has a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 will decrease the volume Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM to Tape or CD mode depending on which radio is in the vehicle The left hand rocker switch has a push button in the center The function of the left hand switch is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand rocker switch operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand swi
129. Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored
130. Power On Off 9 Right Front Temp A C On Off ward overhead console Based on the sensor input the 2 Curent Blower speed 10 me Three Zones g 3 Current Left Front Temperature 11 Mode Select system automatically adjusts the air temperature the air 4 Rear Blower Speed Temp Mode 12 Windshield Defrost w volume and amount of outside air recirculation 5 Sync On when lit 13 Recirculation flos add peaked arts 6 A C On when lit 14 Blower Speed Selects This maintains a comfortable temperature even under 7 Current Right Front Temperature 15 Auto Temperature Control 8 Current Mode Selection changing conditions 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Under the automatic control the system selects the appropriate mode airflow outlets and fan speed 81c3adf2 Front Lower ATC Panel 4 Rear HVAC Lock 5 Rear Window Defrost 1 Blower Speed Select 2 Rear Temp Rear On Off 3 Rear Mode Select Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Begin by pressing the AUTO button and the word AUTO will illuminate in the front ATC display along with three temperatures for Driver s Passenger and Rear seats The system will then automatically regulate the amount of air flow 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver s passenger and rear seat rotary temperature knobs Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and maintain
131. R ERR 457 Fud EeakS 5 vna SUPR Euh Cr Ue ES 92 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 0 0 00 0005 436 Automatic Transmission 436 Brake i ouk Sis GG e OWA dab ERE ees 434 Power Steering 0 000000 eee 423 Eli ds s escea aoe dd pare exp X RYE 458 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 458 Fog Light Service Cet RE 454 Fog Lights i i isses n 160 228 454 Fold in Floor Stow n Go Seating 135 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle liess 401 Fuel save a erate sepa a NEN ain ace EIE 355 Adding esse Pe GES tie ur a eee dk 360 AddiUVeS 5 gavin oacg de as Bias ened arden CAU 358 Clean AE sube atere PR teh kE Shades 357 Filler Cap Gas Cap 005 222 360 Filler Door Gas Cap en INDEX 487 Gasoline xe cee ad HR eae OE RO 355 Gage ad x oh aed een ohne dace da qd 2d 222 loh TCR TETTE 432 Light RE RE sihik aiid 229 Octane Rating 0 00 eee eee 458 Requirements 0 00 00 c ee eee 355 457 System Hoses opress 6 ee eee 432 Tank Capacity 6 6 eee 457 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel System Caution 358 Euelifig za dee E aur deiade es 360 FUSES seed cache ec deg bey Rene UR eek do 444 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 184 Gas Cap Fuel Fillr Cap 360 361 410 Gasoline Clean Air llle 357 Gasoline Fuel ecs caa setata d Pitsid ei 355 Gasoline Reformulated 35
132. RAL the distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles 160 km and the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph 72 km h Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans mission geartrain failure If the transmission is not op erative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100 miles 160 km the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels off the ground CAUTION e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result Always use wheel lift equipment when towing from the front The only other approved method of towing is with a flat bed truck Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal liftgate and fascia will occur Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the OFF position not in the LOCK or ACCESSORY positions E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403 If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACCESSORY position Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing with out the ignition key is with a flat bed truck Proper towing equipment
133. STARTING PROCEDURE When jump starting proceed as follows WARNING 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started inadvertent electrical contact Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be r started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach and the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged i 1 I battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from without letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the improperly so follow this procedure carefully ded x B eerie en i ignition switch to the OFF position for both vehicles Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over batte when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch eac 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated loads area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
134. T SYSTEM ED 7 of amp X BAS ELECTRONIC STABILITY HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR Lock ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE OUTLET Low PEDALS SPEEDCONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE zD gt l af zx z BRAKE SYSTEM LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPERANDLOWER HEATEDSEAT WINDOWLIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILL DESCENT WARNING PARKING POWER OUTLET AJR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE L4 4 A 2 s Awo e Cv FRONTFOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWERAIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK OUTLET 4 WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM Ot gy Al awor srake LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM REARFOG LAMP ANDLIFTGATE DEFROSTAND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE P afi e Her Lb HAUL VOICE SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON er d S ON A A t3 Low LOWER ANCHORS AIRBAG SLIDINGDOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANDTETHERFOR UCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S 8191e970 AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO Li INTRODUCTION 5 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedu
135. TE Each time the SET S button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Press the driver door memory button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s side view mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 7 Press and release the SET S button located on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling that you are in the memory set mode 8 Within 5 seconds press and release memory button 1 or 2 on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling to you that the driver memory has been set The next step must be performed within 5 seconds if you desire to also use a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the transmitters A chime will sound signaling to you that the transmitter has been successfully linked to memory es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
136. TEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 C RND SINGLE DISC MP3 PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT 81c7c564 RES Radio Non Satellite Model Shown With Satellite Similar Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable statio
137. TING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release If the storage bin cover strap disengages from the latch it can be reinstalled by inserting the loose end of the strap into the latch mechanism Push the strap into the latch mechanism until it engages around the latch post Reinstall Cover Strap NOTE Do not use the storage bin emergency release to lift the storage bin cover The strap is intended for emergency release only 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions e Pretensioning and load limiting retractors for the front seat belts e Advanced multistage driver and new active vent front passenger airbags e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee Bolsters Blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belt retractors incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s and third row center position include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjust ing the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat If you will be carrying children too small for adult size
138. The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Depress the brake pedal before shifting into any driving gear Normal Starting Above 32 F 0 C 1 Do not depress the accelerator 2 Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running 3 If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure steps 1 3 above NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be depressed to shift out of Park P Extremely Cold Weather Starting Below 20 F 29 C Follow the same instructions in the Normal Starting procedure To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended High Altitude Starting Above 4 000 ft 1 219 m Follow the same instructions in the Normal Starting procedure To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 If Engine Fail
139. These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to push button memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone lf Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System is available with e One or two video screens e Additional single disc DVD player with 2 screen system e Battery powered two channel remote control es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 e Two channel remote headphones e Integrated remote storage in either screen location e 3 different medias can be played simultaneously Cabin speakers and Headphone Channels 1 and 2 e Easy menu driven functions on touch screen radios e Video and Audio input jacks available in rear seating area e 9 different medias to choose from in each screen AM FM Sirius Radio DVD1 DVD2 Hardrive Jukebox AUX in radio AUX1 AUX2 Overhead Video Screens The LCD screen s are located in the overhead compart ment console 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 8161d54e Remote Control Location NOTE Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being
140. Trailer Wt 3 8L Automatic with 8 600 lbs 3 900 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 Up to 2 persons amp 380 Ibs 172 kg trailer tow package square meters Luggage 3 800 Ibs 1 723 kg 8 600 Ibs 3 900 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 3 to 5 persons amp 335 Ibs 152 kg square meters Luggage 3 350 Ibs 1 519 kg 8 600 Ibs 3 900 kg 40 SQ FT 3 72 6 to 7 persons amp 300 Ibs 136 kg square meters Luggage 3 000 Ibs 1 360 kg For vehicles equipped with Fold in Floor seating the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 Ibs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information Section in this manual Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch STARTING AND OPERATING 377 TOW HEIGHT 81546c40 Consider the followi
141. UConnect and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will be use only the first 24 characters Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phone book is recom mended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phone book entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phone book entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phone book entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin
142. UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voicemail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phone book entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voicemail systems have system timeout settings too short that may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status an
143. WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidently set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you aren t using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET lever downward and then release Lift your foot off the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the lever CANCEL toward you will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pushing the ON OFF button to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed raise the lever RESUME ACCEL upwards and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 To Vary the Speed Setting When the speed control is set speed can be increased by raising and holding the lever RESUME ACCEL up wards When released a new set speed will be estab lished Raising the lever RESUME ACCEL upwards once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped upwards speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is set press the lever SET DECEL downward an
144. a chime will sound to alert the driver es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Headlight Low High Beam Selector Switch Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to HIGH and pull toward yourself normal position to return to LOW beam Flash to Pass Optical Horn You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever fully toward your self This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Windshield Wiper and Washer The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within the Multifunction Lever Rotate the end of the lever to Windshield Wipe Wash Control select the desired wiper speed 1 Multifunction Lever Mist Front Wiper and Washer 2 Intermittent Low and High Wiper NOTE Always remove any build up of snow that 3 Rotary Ring Rear Wiper and Washer prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to 4 Headlamp Low and High Beam and Flash to Pass the OFF position If the windshield wiper switch is turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the OFF position damage to the wiper motor may occur 81bcf9d2 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Mist Press the end of the Multifunction Lever inward to the first detent and release to clear the wind shield Pressing the Multifunction Lever inward to the second detent will cause the washers to spray for a maximum of 20 sec
145. action Control 0 0 0 0 cee ng osi 175 322 Traction Control Switch 00 0000 322 Trailer TOWING 5a sen eder ik Hae kpa Eod 369 Cooling System Tips 00000 384 Hitch S gcc ane whi gen haa cha acolo Paw a BEES 374 Minimum Requirements 05 378 Trailer and Tongue Weight 377 linux 381 Trailer Towing Guide 004 374 Trailer Weight 229m 5 tse ease ee tne es s 374 Transaxle seinag i eae hae hind alee hap alas 313 Automate sss oh RREG ER one Re 313 Operation ssere cidew tans Gideon tibet 313 Overdrive 4 zddceXce dc EE Rae dO E RU RES 317 Selection of Lubricant 436 459 Transmission llle 435 Automatic 213239433 Pooks ed berg gef 435 Idi M Lc 436 459 498 INDEX BEEN Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry o chased cate ba ARR e ER 28 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 184 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 23 Transporting Pets sessie seii bensi diei ies 85 Tread Wear Indicators 0 0005 341 Trip Computer issues Ra 233 Trip Odometer 00 04 ober rre Rr Ee 225 Tum Signals 000004 162 223 454 455 UCI Connector 4 6335 3 Ee RP ERREUR 272 UConnect Hands Free Phone 102 268 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 476 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 272 Universal Joints 4 2 m Rm 424 Universal Serial Bus USB Port
146. add sufficient fluid to bring to the proper level CAUTION Do not overfill Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is reseated properly 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for the recommended transaxle fluid and filter change intervals If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Special Additives Do not add any fluid additives to the transaxle The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transaxle sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals Front And Rear Wheel Bearings Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold wea
147. al two seconds after the window is fully open Power Window Lockout Switch The driver may lock out all power windows by depress ing the bar switch just below the power window switches Power Window Lockout Switch ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Front Passenger Power Window Switch There is a single switch on the passenger s door trim panel which operates the passenger door window The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position 81bb70c3 1 Passenger Power Window Switch 2 Passenger Power Door Lock 3 Passenger Power Door Unlock Rear Sliding Door Power Window Switch If Equipped Second Row passengers may operate the sliding door window by a single switch on each door handle assem DE bly The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Please note that the sliding door windows do Wind Buffeting not lower completely stopping several inches above the Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of window sill pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows to
148. aler or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which
149. ameter in Inches in es STARTING AND OPERATING 329 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 330 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Tire Identification Number TIN located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted however the date code may only be on one side Tires with on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side white sidewalls
150. and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 472 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na t
151. are permanently sealed No regular maintenance is required for these compo nents Steering Shaft Seal The steering shaft seal at the point where the shaft passes through the bulkhead is lubricated when it is installed If the seal becomes noisy when the steering shaft is turned it should be lubricated with a multipurpose grease Mopar multipurpose lubricant is recommended Steering Linkage The tie rod end ball joints are permanently lubricated and do not require periodic maintenance 7 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Drive Shaft Universal Joints Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints Peri odic lubrication of these joints is not required However the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed If leakage or damage is evident the universal joint boot and grease should be replaced immediately Continued operation could result in failure of the univer sal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the grease This would require complete replacement of the joint assembly Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors liftgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and gr
152. argo loading conditions A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The vehicle must be driven to reset the system WARNING Do not install the load leveling system on vehicles that are not equipped with Anti Lock Brakes Ve hicles without Anti Lock Brakes ABS have a height sensing proportioning valve Installing a leveling system will render this system ineffective inappro priately reducing rear brake pressure resulting in increased stopping distances You could have an accident UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panels And Controls 219 Bi Base Instrument Cluster 0005 220 Bl Premium Instrument Cluster 221 Bi Instrument Cluster Descriptions 222 ll Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC If Equipped cc sacks ceva m 233 Odometer Display o seme eau 233 Compass Mini Trip Computer Reset Button 233 Trip Odometer ODO sssssse 234 Compass Temperature Display Bl Radio General Information aaaa Radio Broadcast Signals 236 Two Types Of Signals e essas
153. at from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service 388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas For vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating if it is necessary to retrieve the spare tire from under the vehicle on the side of the vehicle close
154. at a time Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Location Enter Number Phonebook New Entry Added 81c6br80 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup Toggle Par List Phones New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit System Lists override pin code Phones Select phone e ichs to be deleted PEE Ones P i Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists confirms Phones Phone Deleted All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial Six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return o
155. ate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch plates which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Buckle the child into the seat according t
156. ately To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions Maintenance Free Battery The top of the MAINTENANCE FREE battery is perma nently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post
157. ately 8576 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline 364 STARTING AND OPERATING ME For best results a refueling pattern that alternates be tween E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch fuels it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 L when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in Mopar engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting DaimlerChrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufac turer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements devel oped during extensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to DaimlerChrysler Corporation engines Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 CAUTION
158. avy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of regular gasoline be fore considering service for the vehicle Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available es STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your v
159. axle AutoStick has no dipstick and is dealer serviced only Fluid Level Check 3 3L Engine with 4 Speed Automatic Transaxle The dipstick is located just behind the radiator lower right side 4 SPEED DIPSTICK _AnpoScoinga oF Snot Ro 80f34e48 4 Speed ATX Diptstick ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 The vehicle must be on level ground 2 The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Fully apply parking brake 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P PARK Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle 5 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or warm Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has been driven at least 15 miles 24 km The fluid cannot be comfortably held between the finger tips Cold is when the fluid is below 80 F 27 C 6 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Remove dipstick and note reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD If the fluid level indicates low
160. belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH later in this section An aftermarket belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child can not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN CBS enar ue cough lowell Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt WARMING comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant over the front of the seat when their back is against the or child restraint It could come loose in a collision seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when install e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat ing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug used in a rear seat A rearward facing child restraint as possible in the front seat may be st
161. cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety 382 STARTING AND OPERATING The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations RIGHT STOP TURN LEFT FEMALE STOP TURN T PINS PARK ES GND MALE PIN 813262be 4 Pin Connector RUNNING BATTERY LAMPS BACKUP LAMPS LH STOP RH TURN STOP o TURN ELECTRIC GROUND ZU VU BRAKES 812634c6 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping a
162. ccden saa ye PEE 429 Radiator Cap 1225s secus Res e ona RS 429 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 428 457 458 Cruise Control Speed Control 171 Cup Holder oasis ieee hee dea 196 444 Customer Assistance less 470 Data Recorder Event 0 0000 eee ene 75 Daytime Running Lights 159 Dealer Service ss 0 0 0c eee 412 Defroster Rear Window s 303 Defroster Windshield 91 286 296 HO 484 INDEX MMM Diagnostic System Onboard 409 Digital Video Disc DVD Player 265 268 Dimmer Control 0 0 000 ee eee 157 Dimmer Switch Headlight 165 Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle 2 05 436 Automatic Transmission 436 Qil Engine iiis caw eed extet we hs 413 Disabled Vehicle Towing 56 402 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 430 Engine Oll og oa ces hie ces ee enm tess hed 415 Domelight 2 9 ERR s 157 Door Locks 12 aed eR Ra ERE RR RR ROS 31 Door Locks Automatic 0000008 33 Door Opener Garage lille 184 Drive Belts seco b RE RR oes 416 Drive Shaft Universal Joints 424 Driving On Slippery Surfaces sse eee 324 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing WAGE esce Sacto uite aa x Rod OR e dos 325 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 280 Ez85 FUG uuo soper bae ait Anarene 3
163. ce if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and stow it 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to protect the driver front and
164. cle Certification Label Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the driver s door pillar The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 WARNING Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tire Size The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the ti
165. cm Yellow None 2nd LED 47 in 120 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 39 in 100 cm Yellow None 4th LED 31 5 in 80 cm 31 5 in 80 cm Yellow None 5th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 25 5 in 65 cm Yellow None 6th LED 20 in 50 cm 20 in 50 cm Yellow None 7th LED 16 in 40 cm 16 in 40 cm Red at 12 in 30 cm Intermittent at 8 in 20 cm Continuous es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 WARNING CAUTION Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Sense System Always e To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Park Sense check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Before using the Rear Park Sense System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red LEDs ON Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle System shoul
166. conds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after 5 seconds press the UNLOCK button Release both buttons The Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature can be I reactivated by repeating this procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped The table below explains the Lamp Flash options Which Turn Signal Number of Function Lamps Flashes Lock All 1 Unlock 1st Left Side 2 Press Unlock All All 2 Doors Left Side Left Side 2 Right Side Right Side 2 Liftgate All 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration If your Remote Keyless Entry transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Materia
167. continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational
168. cresensa eras 236 Electrical Disturbances 237 AM RECEPHON vv Bee Penn REA gs 237 PM Reception ac eie CERRO CR 237 lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack xs vomer gis ehem Y RUE MUR RD RES 238 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 246 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 248 List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play PTT 251 Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA PS cae chin 1b Oe apre eie Ha Ice ds 251 lll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack 0040 253 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 253 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 00 0000 259 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 261 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 264 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play ll Sales Code REN Multimedia System If Equipped Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure ll Sales Code RER Multimedia System If Equipped Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Operating Instructions
169. ct the following format types Program Type 16 E er eae No program type or un Penal None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Use the Tune Control Knob to scroll through the entries Push the Audio Select button to select an entry and make changes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to
170. curely stowed vehicle is being jacked spares must be stowed with the value stem facing the ground 390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Jack Location The jack jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area Turn the two cover latches to release the cover 8 81bb8b7e 1 Tie Down 2 Rear Power Switch Bank 3 Tire Jack Handle Storage 4 Cubby Speaker 5 Liftgate Power Close Switch 6 Bag Holders 7 Child Seat LATCH Anchor 8 Rechargeable Flash Light Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack jack handle and tools Spare Tire Stowage For vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating the spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located under the center of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mecha nism The spare tire drive nut is located on the floor under a plastic cap at the front of the floor console NOTE The base console if equipped must be removed to raise and lower the spare tire Refer to Console Features in Section Three for the console removal pro cedure The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as sembled into a Spare Tire Hook to remove the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle or a Winch T Handle to raise lower the compact spare tire cover assembly Spare Tire Hook Handle Stow n Go Tools Winch T 814acba6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 391 Jacking Instruc
171. d On vehicles equipped with Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC the display provides the outside temperature one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing and the current radio station Refer to Compass Mini Trip Computer later in this section ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 COMPASS MINI TRIP COMPUTER CMTC IF EQUIPPED The Compass Mini Trip Computer features a driver interactive display displays information on outside tem perature compass direction and trip information It is located on the lower left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine temperature gauge and the tachometer Odometer Display When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required CRUISE vus eS HO ee Ae ES Cruise Activated dOOr oed CSAS ae BSR Een Door Ajar ESPOFF gt scan he be ea cs ESP Deactivated BATE Sov dea der s RR dra ca ak Lift Gate Ajar SASCAP s ck dace neas paaa aes Fuel Cap Fault NOPUSE 2 L22em kde RES Fuse Fault LoCOOL 42 w 22m RA Low Coolant LoWASH Low Washer Fluid These messages can be manually turned off by pressing the right reset button on the instrument cluster Compass Mini Trip Computer Reset Button CMTC Reset Button Secondary Reset Button Press the left reset button to scroll through sub menus i e Trip Functions AVG Fuel Economy DTE Elapsed Time and Units
172. d This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the Park position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of Park and all doors closed This feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks Lock or Unlock The Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following proce dure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this program ming procedure 3 Insert the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps WINDOWS 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled Power Vent Windows If Equipped before the feature could be changed If necessary repeat Switches on the driver s door trim panel let the driver PN the above procedure operate the two vent windows from the driver s seat The Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit feature can be reactivate
173. d 3 Power Mirror Adjust Switch If Equipped Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the direction you want the mirror to move 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Driver s power mirror preselected positions can be con trolled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in section 3 of this manual Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the Rear Window Defrost The heated mirrors turn off automatically after about 10 minutes of operation as long as the ignition switch is in the RUN position After the initial time interval has expired if the rear window defogger switch is pressed to the on position again during the same ignition cycle the system will automatically turn off after about 5 minutes NOTE You may turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime by pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights turn on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER radio contains an inte grated Hands Free Communication UConnect sys tem Refer to your Navigation User s Manual f
174. d 2 9 Quarts 2 8 Liters if equipped with a rear heater 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil Oil Filter 3 3L amp 3 8L Engines Spark Plugs 3 3L amp 3 8L Engines Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 engine oil Refer to your oil filler cap for cor rect SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Mopar 5281090 or equivalent ZFR5LP 13G Gap 050 in 1 27 mm Fuel Selection 87 Octane ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar Power Steering Fluid 4 or Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 462 Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 0 0 462 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N m E N A N C E S C H E D
175. d any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open amp close while you train 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section e After training a HomeLink
176. d be used on all four tires Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacture es STARTING AND OPERATING 345 NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of 4 failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION Tires on t
177. d by repeating the above mentioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped NOTE Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h and Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit features in accordance with local laws 81b78a1a 1 Power Vent Open 2 Power Vent Close 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Power Windows You can control either front window using switches on the driver s door trim panel The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCES SORY position NOTE Power Window Switches will also remain active for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off depending upon the accessory delay setting Opening the front door will cancel this feature Master Power Window Switches 81b78a19 1 Left Sliding Door 2 Right Sliding Door 3 Left Front Door 4 Right Front Door Auto Down Feature If Equipped The driver s window switch has an auto down feature Press the window switch past the detent release and the window will go down automatically ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To open the window part way press the window switch part way and release it when you want the window to stop Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection The driver s window switch has an auto up feature Lift the window switch t
178. d hold Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the lever SET DECEL downward once will result in a 1 mph 1 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped downward speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Your vehicle will experience a downshift to 3rd gear automatic transmissions only while climbing uphill or descending downhill This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS Anti Lock Brake System TCS Traction Control System BAS Brake Assist System ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation and ESP Electronic Stability Program
179. d if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service If your seat includ ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer ap proved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Airbag Light You will want to have the airbags ready to ar inflate for your protection in a collision While N the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system
180. d only be used as a parking aid and is unable to recognize every obstacle including small objects Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Park Sense System to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver look over his her shoulder when using the Rear Park Sense System 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the system operating properly e Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system If Service Park Sense System appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The adjust able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position The switch is located on the left side of the steering column Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the button forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle
181. d siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 68 kg 150 lbs and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To move the cross bars loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of each cross bar approximately six turns then move the cross bar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the cross bar is in place retighten the thumb screws to lock the cross bar into position Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has properly locked into position NOTE To help control wind noise when installing the cross bars make sure that the arrows marked on the front side of the cross bars are facing the front of the vehicle Also when the cross bars are not in use the notch on the cross bars should be aligned with the arrows on the side rails This will help reduce the amount of wind noise when the crossbars are not in use The tie down holes on the cross bar ends should always be used to tie down the load Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
182. d you will be given the choice to change it 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other
183. dards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Di
184. de window demist outlets Use this setting when necessary to defrost your windshield and side windows NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass The snowflake or a c button allows the opera tor to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When the snowflake symbol in the ATC display is on cool dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If economy mode is desired press the snowflake button to turn off the snowflake icon in the ATC display and deactivate the air conditioning system Note If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select defrost mode and increase blower speed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the recirculation button The recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation symbol will illuminate in the display when this button is UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 selected Push the button a second time to turn off the recirculation icon in the display and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Floor Mix and Defr
185. ded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ABS light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds es If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 When the vehicle is driven over approximately 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking
186. dio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc SALES CODE RES AM FM S
187. direc tion is displayed with the CAL indicator on continu ously in the display To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on
188. e for 3 seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which TPMS Sensor s is not being received 81826bd7 Check TPM System Display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPMS Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ME be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of excessive snow and or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a TPMS SENSOR Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPMS Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display
189. e paint 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e The PRY location is best closes to the studs while dislodging them separately 81bc563e 1 Stop Tail Turn Signal Bulb Combo 2 Backup Bulb 3 Remove the socket by rotating counter clockwise 4 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket 5 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the light assembly Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL The CHMSL uses LED lights and is not serviceable The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly License Light There are two license plate lights both located under the tailgate light bar and above the license plate After determining which light is out follow the steps below 1 Remove the two lens assembly mounting screws 2 Pull the bulb out of the socket Replace the bulb and reattach the lens assembly es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel approximate All Engines 20 5 Gallons 77 6 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 3L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 0 Quarts 4 7 Liters 3 8L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 0 Quarts 4 7 Liters Cooling System 3 3L Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile For 13 4 Quarts 12 6 Liters mula or equivalent 3 8L Engine Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile For 13 4 Quarts 12 6 Liters mula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level Ad
190. e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phone book entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phone book from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phone book entry in the current language is deleted ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phone book entries will be deleted e Note that only the phone book in the current language is deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phon
191. e Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME to the car speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include direct tune music type selections easy store presets backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your Radio Specific User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Radio Specific User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual for detailed operating instruc tions Clock Setting Procedure Setting the Clock 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word
192. e a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure
193. e beverage cups or 20 oz plastic bottles Cup Holders are dish washer safe for cleaning e Top Storage Tray e Cup Holders Tray top is removable to access a large storage bin 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Console is removable from the vehicle for additional floor space by removing the cap at the console base 81c27778 1 Anchor Plug 2 Console Base 81c27779 Removal of Basic Floor Console 1 Console Anchor 3 Front Cup Holders 2 Top Tray 4 Rear Cup Holders e Remove the front plug and clip e Slide the console forward while lifting slightly to clear the rear load floor hook e Remove the console es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 To reinstall the console e Position the console at a slight angle front slightly higher than the rear e Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket hook e Align the console until the anchor plug hole is cen tered on the winch hole Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down ward on the console with slight pressure reinstall the cover plug e Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the remov able floor console is not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched Premium Console Features If Equipped Three part console with sliding storage bin sliding upper tray with storage and large console s
194. e book entries e To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press Phone button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button
195. e screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed SALES CODE RER MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The RER multimedia system contains a radio Sirius Satellite Radio player Navigation system CD DVD player USB port 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD and the UConnect hands free Bluetooth cellular system NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnect the unit will respond with a Feature Not Available message when selecting controls related to this feature A 6 5 inch touch screen allows easy menu selection while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than 1 000 words for audio navigation entertainment and hands free mobile phone use The satellite navigation capability combines a Global
196. e set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 hours and in outside ambient temperature Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural air pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS warning lamp to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TPMS warning lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than 3 hours placard of 35 F 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 2
197. e vehicle BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating erake Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic O brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability the remaining system will still function There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Lamp Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped The Anti Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop 320 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING e Anti lock system ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction affor
198. earward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual To Close the sunroof from an open or vent position press and hold the switch forward The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically Release the switch to stop sun roof travel at any point Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully then stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 Auto Sunroof Express with Anti Pinch Protection During express closing anytime an obstacle that restricts glass movement is detected the motor will stop and reverse travel to avoid pinching the object Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a hel
199. ease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accu mulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield and Rear Window Washers The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the engine compartment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water
200. ease strap 3 to rotate the entire seat rearward Tailgate Positioning Release Straps 2 amp 3 2 To restore the seat to its upright position lift up on the seatback and push forward until the anchors latch 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING To avoid serious injury or death never operate the vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in the tailgate mode Easy Access Seating The second row Stow n Go seats can be tilted forward for easy access to the third row seat or rear cargo area To tilt the seat pull forward on the release strap located on the front of the seat between the seat back and seat Tilting Second Row Stow n Go Seat cushion and tilt the seat fully forward u m WARNING To return the seat to it s upright position push rearward on the seat back until it latches Always ensure that it is In the event of a collision you could be injured if the fully latched seat is not fully latched es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Swivel n Go Premium Seating System If Equipped Premium second row Swivel n Go Seating features include Large and plush seat back and seat bottom cushions A table that installs between the second and third row seats The table disassembles and stows in the hidden second row floor storage bin Seats rotate to face forward or rearward Seat belts are integrated into the swivel seats Dual folding armrests A side s
201. ed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs es STARTING AND OPERATING 333 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg 334 STARTING AND OPERATING
202. edure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of 5 times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio
203. ee a ra ee 229 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 227 Oi Pressure is uasa s esimehega RE septs 228 Parka Re e dh eh hop Rara 157 454 Passing ee ko Ue rg ees Pagel Reg 163 165 Reading sesi sana per ate prede Rea dE S 182 Rear Servicing 455229 ra Ee ok pes 455 Reat aM seriosi edet Eee SEESE 455 Seat Belt Reminder 205 229 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 229 ServICB a 5 2 Sh gp Rave oe RIS 452 453 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 227 Side Marker Jit e e eot Remo 455 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 229 Traction Control 2 22 Eh 178 Turn Signal 0000 92 162 454 455 Voltage sss edere E EE pee temas 229 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 222 Load Leveling System 0000005 214 Loading Vehicle 00004 211 366 368 Capacities ispit sad ered Ren A Ed ees 368 TOS PCT 331 Locks DOOR a 4 BSA IECUR Y Y XR Rev ES 31 Steering Wheel p 2 cue es aas Eae enr 4 20 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren CANH eve ies ell RR RO UE RERUM aS 82 Lubrication Body nn INDEX 491 Luggage Rack Roof Rack 212 Lumbar Support oz cee ee wo oa Go ea 134 Maintenance Free Battery 04 418 Maintenance Procedures 000005 412 Maintenance Schedule lees 462 Maintenance Sunroof 0 0 00 eee 191 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 227 410 Manual Service 0 0 ce es 4
204. ehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Metha nol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug 358 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under n
205. electing this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the 4 digit country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default audio language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default subtitle language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between subtitle OFF or ON es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maxi
206. els If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if the ESP is in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Section 3 of this manual m The Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin This indicates that the TCS is active If the indicator light flashes during accel eration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS if equipped WARNING e The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The TCS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a TCS equipped vehicle must
207. elt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what
208. em pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill The system should be drained flushed and refilled at the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 of this manual If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze solution Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct coolant type CAUTION Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en gine coolants may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emer gency it should be replaced with the specified cool ant as soon as possible Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been des
209. engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for 4 minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 19 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped 40 This light shows when the front fog lights are ON 20 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to the Occupant Restraints section for more information 21 Vehicle Theft Alarm Light If Equipped This light will flash for approximately 15 sec o onds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming 22 Airbag Light This light turns on and remains on for 4 9 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 23 Voltage Light This light monitors the electrical system voltage The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a
210. enter EVIC and graph ics displaying tire pressures Yellow TPMS Telltale Lamp 352 STARTING AND OPERATING BEBE Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The TPMS Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the instru ment cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures ac m da mao uaa are low In addition the EVIC will display one or more au Low Pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right oe pecu Front Right Rear for 3 seconds and a graphic display of n T n at ut the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing m x n me a lle na 81826bed Low Tire Pressure Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the TPMS Lamp will extinguish once the up dated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Message The TPMS Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM messag
211. epared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips 476 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE IEEE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government
212. era ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle over heats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 4 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 5 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 6
213. erhead dis plays when the park lights or head lights are on 81bc85ee Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns your headlights ON or OFF based on ambient light levels To turn the system ON turn the headlight switch to the extreme counter clockwise position aligning the indicator with the A on the headlight switch When the system is ON the Head light Time Delay feature is also ON This means your headlights will stay ON for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the Automatic System OFF turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O OFF position es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 81bc85ed Automatic Headlights NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come ON in the Automatic mode Daytime Running Lights Canada Fleet Vehicles Only The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the vehicle is running the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal night time driving Lights on Reminder If the headlights or the park lights are left on or if the dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the ignition switch is turned off a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Protection This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing down the battery if the headlights park lights or front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time
214. es 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Pit tate XPD 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 451 92 499 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 MPEG Audio 24 2205 16 112 96 80 64 y 56 48 WMA Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz Bit Bate kbp 48 64 96 128 WMA 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WM
215. esy reading lights Press the lens to turn these lights on standard dome light has two buttons Press a second time to turn the lights off The lights also turn on when a front door a sliding door or the liftgate is opened If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry the lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the transmitter is pressed The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also illuminated from a light in the overhead console This light is turned on when the headlight switch is on and will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is rotated up or down es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 Sunglass Storage At the rear of the overhead console a compartment is provided for the storage of two pair of sunglasses Press the door latch to open the compartment The door will slowly rotate to an open position NOTE The front overhead console used with factory sunroof incorporates a sunroof switch Rear Overhead Console If Equipped The rear overhead storage system is available in two versions with or without sunroof Wibbabas 1 Storage or DVD Screen 5 Storage 2 Rear Climate Controls 6 Storage or DVD Screen 3 Courtesy Map Lights 7 Courtesy Map Lights 4 Storage 8 Recessed Halo Lighting An additional LED at the front of the console shines down on the second row footwell area in courtesy mode for added convenience 184 UNDERSTANDING
216. ete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes CO follow the safety tips below to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and If you are required to drive with the trunk open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Airbag Warning Light Vehicle The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 Seat Belts seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see you frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system pa eave a rized dealer Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor
217. explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do terminal of the discharged battery Connect the other end not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an ya output that exceeds 12 volts of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the battery hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be hurt by the fan 400 WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery tem perature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above seq
218. f the vehicle The ORC does detect and protect for rollover when equipped with side airbags 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment and the vehicle communication network intact and the power intact the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following functions e Cuts off fuel to the engine e Flashes hazard lights e Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlocks the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC detect a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver front passenger and rear passengers and then immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickl
219. f the seat frame and will ease the removal process 5 Lower the release handle located at the bottom front edge of the seat Each seat weighs about 90 lbs es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 NOTE Flectrical contacts for the available heated seats automatically disengage or engage as the seat is removed or installed The contacts slide past each other as the seat is rolled to and from the strikers When reinstalling the seat make certain to lower the release handle to ensure the seat is latched securely WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched Swivel n Go Premium Seating Table If Equipped The Swivel n Go Seating Table consists of an easily assembled post and top 2nd Row Seating and Table 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The table and leg are stored beneath the floor when not in use To install the table follow these steps Table and Leg Storage 2 3 Obtain the pole and table top by loosening the hook 2nd Row Seating and Table and loop straps 1 Swivel the 2nd row seats so they are facing the rear 4 Insert pole into base by aligning the lock button into 2 Open the floor tub in front of the second row seats notch of the base es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 81bd165c 1 Table Base 2 Base Lock Relea
220. flation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the TPMS Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received 350 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this infor mation The TPMS Telltale Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on sold when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat provid ing the system fault still exists The TPMS Telltale Lamp will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following sce narios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of excessive snow and or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a TPMS Sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warnin
221. g 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The power liftgate must be in the full open or close WARNING positions for any of the buttons to operate If the liftgate is not in the full open or close positions it must be opened or closed manually e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your e If the liftgate release button is activated while the passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the the liftgate closed when you are operating the full open position vehicle e The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is If you are required to drive with the liftgate open in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed e The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures DO NOT use the recirculation mode below 12 F 24 C or temperatures above 143 F 62 C Be sure to remove any build up of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power Gas props support the liftgate in the open position liftgate buttons However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when e If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions opening the liftgate in cold weather within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and
222. g limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn on 3 After driving for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS Lamp will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h for the TPMS to receive this information Premium TPMS with EVIC If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo nents e Receiver Module e 4 TPMS Sensors e 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells Various TPMS Messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information C
223. g and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 336 STARTING AND OPERATING BEBE 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the face of the driver s door or on the driver s side B pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 check tire pressure Do not mak
224. gainst the door Sit upright in the center of the seat 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if a frontal or side collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the front airbags side inflatable airbag curtains side seat thorax airbags and front seat belt pretensioners as re quired for each type of impact The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the components listed above except the steering wheel and column instrument panel and seatbelt reminder light If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that will deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning light in the instrument panel for approximately 4 to 5 seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the AIRBAG warning light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the AIRBAG warning light e
225. ge when the second row seat is in the upright position 81bd58c1 1 Standard Map Pocket 4 Bottle Holder 2 Mesh Map Pocket 5 Side Mesh Pocket 2 Bag Holder Storage Bin Cover Lock Release es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the Unlocked position to allow greater access to the storage bin CAUTION NOTE The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks which have minimal clearance to the cover Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin cover open Keep the storage bin cover closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not operate the storage bin cover while the vehicle is in motion Do not use the storage bin latch as a tie down 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Overhead Console Storage If Equipped WARNING The overhead storage system comes in several options In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if the storage bins are not properly latched to the Overhead Rail System Always be sure the stor age bins are fully latched Removable Floor Console With Stow n Go Seating If Equipped The removable floor console has two power outlets storage tray
226. gether to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting 81bb8d6 d 1 Heated Seat Switch 4 Door Handle 2 Window Switch 5 Door Switch 3 Lock Lever ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 SLIDING SIDE DOOR The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the outside Pull outward on exterior handle to open the sliding door The sliding door inside handle functions by rocking forward and back Rocking the handle back wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the hold open latch in order to close the door To keep your door operating properly observe the fol lowing guidelines e Always open the door smoothly e Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open ing the door This is very important when your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in the downhill direction e There is a hold open latch that is activated when the sliding door is fully opened This latch will keep your sliding door open on any incline To close the sliding door after the hold open latch is activated you must rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the outside handle Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched any time the vehicle is in motion NOTE The driver s side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is f
227. gs time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Setting the User Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the system clock you can manually adjust the time by performing the following 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom of the screen where the words GPS Time are displayed The user clock time setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the sc
228. h To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers depress the switch on the instrument panel When the Hazard Warn ing Switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer gency Push the switch a second time to turn off the flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning Flash ers may wear down your battery E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transmission in neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to floor and the fan control to High This allows the heater core to act asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing he
229. h open storage areas located in each rear trim panel 1 Tie Down 2 Rear Power Switch Bank 3 Tire Jack Handle Storage 4 Cubby Speaker 8 81bb8b7e 5 Liftgate Power Close Switch 6 Bag Holders 7 Child Seat LATCH Anchor 8 Rechargeable Flash Light es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 Coat Hooks Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second and third row seating positions The coat hook load limit is 10 Ibs 4 5 kg Exceeding the recommended load limit can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle Cargo Area Storage The seats in your vehicle are in line which enables you to stow long objects such as lumber or skis on the floor without moving the seats NOTE With all rear seat backs folded a 4 x 8 foot sheet of building material may be stored in the long wheelbase body style on top of the folded seats with the liftgate closed The front seats must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position If the rear seats are removed no front seat adjustment is needed and more than one 4 x 8 sheet of building material may be stored The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement Load To This Line This line indicates how far rearward cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate closing Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars an
230. he REAR LOCK icon in the rear temperature knob ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 2 Rotate the Rear Blower Rear Temperature and the Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs 3 Automatic Temperature Control is selected by adjust ing the rear blower knob counter clockwise to AUTO Once the desired temperature is displayed the ATC system will achieve and maintain that comfort level automatically When the system is set up for your com fort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Overhead Console Customer Program mable Features in Section 3 of this manual Rear Blower Control The rear blower control knob can be manually set to OFF or any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob from low to high This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System through an intake grille located in the passenger side t
231. he driver s power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat The front switch controls up down forward rearward and tilt adjustment The rear switch controls the seatback recline adjustment 81bd1648 Driver Power Seat Switch 1 Seat Bottom Control 2 Seat Back Control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Pull up or push down on the head restraint so that the upper edge is as high as practical To raise the head restraint pull up on the head restraint To lower the head restraint depress the release tab located at the base of the head restraint and push down on the head restraint 1 Removal Release Tab 81bd164e 2 Lowering Release Tab 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The controls for front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area The switch in dicator lights will show when the LOW or HIGH heat is ON Press the switch once to choose LOW one light press a second time to choose HIGH two Lights or press a
232. he front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 346 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram TIRE ROTATION PATTERN FRONT OF VEHICLE E Ed lt E i E 4 TIRE ROTATION 80ba79fe TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure the placard is located on the drivers side B pillar The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always b
233. hird time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 program format type to be selected Many radio stations do 16 Digit Character not currently broadcast Music Type information Program Type Display Toggle the Music Type button to select the following Nostalgia Nostalga format types Oldies Oldies 16 Digit Character Personality Persnlty Program Type Display Public Public No program type or un None Rhythm and Blues R amp B defined Religious Music Rel Musc Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft College College Soft Rock Soft Rck Country Country Soft Rhythm
234. icable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer 474 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Wash ington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield R
235. ich is not a valid USA phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phone book to learn how to store a name in the phone book 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you
236. icopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean EE the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result
237. id 222 sssos ms 459 Brake Parking ues ERR EX RES 317 Brake System 4 eR ees 319 433 Anti Lock ABS 174 319 Fluid Check 22s asc IRR E 434 HOSES MC ORT 433 Warning Light 482 INDEX aa Brakes serran na Ego Ned RR ace ROS ER ERU 319 433 Brake Transmission Interlock 313 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 88 Bulb Replacement 00000050 453 Bulbs Light sse Re 92 452 Calibration Compass 0 0 0000005 235 Capacities Fluid 0 0 00 spies 457 Caps Filler UGH euer mee abana te ale a ARCH ae EAR aco 360 Oil Engirie v et rue ee agua EPIS 414 Radiator Coolant Pressure 429 Car Washes 3c 0 024 er bebe ee ees 439 Carbon Monoxide Warning 89 359 Cargo Compartment Luggage Cartier iic dris ours a aa 212 Cargo Vehicle Loading 0 211 Catalytic Converter 1 6 eee eee 417 Caution Exhaust Gas 000 50 359 CD Compact Disc Player 265 268 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 283 Cellular Phone 102 268 269 282 Center High Mounted Stop Light 456 Chains Tite 5 aca ec eR eT OE EEG 344 Changing A Flat Tire 0 0005 388 Chart Tire Sizing 5 ess m nnn 328 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light idum eee seesaw teas Y 227 410 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 89 Checks Salety as sud eS SS
238. ights turn on the park lights or the low beam headlights and push in the headlight switch control knob Pressing the head light switch control knob in a second time will turn the front fog lights off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Halo Lights If Equipped To activate the Halo lights push in the Halo XZ switch control knob Pressing the switch con trol knob in a second time will turn the Halo lights off 81bca4d8 Fog Light Switch 81bca4d9 Head Light Switch with Halo 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M MULTIFUNCTION LEVER The Multifunction Lever assembly controls e Turn Signals e Headlamp Low and High Beams e Flash to Pass Optical Horn e Front and Rear Wiper Washer functions Turn Signals Move the Multifunction Lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the base instrument cluster or Information Center flash to indicate proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside turn signal light bulb If one of the indicators fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator light is defective zu 81 befod4 Turn Signal Switch Turn Signal Warning If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled at over 18 mph 29 km h for about one mile with the turn signals on
239. igned for use with Propylene Glycol based coolants Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 102 000 miles before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi tive Technology HOAT coolant When adding coolant a minimum solution of 50 rec ommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The
240. iles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while Once a Month the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD SAFE or MIN mark Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Check the fl
241. imme diately The AIRBAG light does not come on during the approximately 4 to 5 seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on e The light remains on after the approximately 4 to 5 second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to approximately 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag de ployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavail able NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunc
242. in the list and turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track RW Rewind Button Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the current track Holding the RW button long enough will take you back to the beginning of the current track Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back 5 seconds of the current track FF Fast Forward Button Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the current track 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward 5 seconds of the current track SEEK Buttons Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next track If the left down button is pressed during the first 2 seconds of the current track it will go back to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the current track it will go back to the beginning of the track If the right up button is pressed during Play mode it will go to the next track in the list INFO Button Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the information Track Title Artist Album etc for that track Each press the INFO button will take you to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all of the screens the last press of the INFO button will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio REPEAT Button Press the REPEAT button to repeat the cur
243. in to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a t
244. ine overheating A 50 solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended Refer to section 7 Maintenance Procedures of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation To insure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to section 7 Maintenance Procedures of this manual for proper coolant selection Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy or humid weather To clear the windows select defrost or mix mode and increase the front blower speed Do not use the Recirculation mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they ente
245. ing severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Should the Loose Fuel Filler Cap or gASCAP mes sage appear there may be a problem in the evaporative system Before taking the vehicle into a qualified Dealer ship Service center check first to see if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off Take your vehicle in to a qualified Dealership Service center EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Light is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board
246. injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up WARNING on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collisio
247. ion The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States sos csse RR RR n KR5S 120123 Canada suce x sige hae oie ate a 3 2671 S120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 3L amp 3 8L GASOLINE ENGINES All engines are designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD 356 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance FUEL REQUIREMENTS 4 0L GASOLINE ENGINES The 4 0L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular and mid grade gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING IReMy2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued he
248. ional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 473 WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties appl
249. ires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicles UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone uy amp for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons Phone Button and Voice Recognition Button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio a The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See UCon nect website for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume cont
250. is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the limitations described in this section TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow a front wheel drive vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS B 3 3L 3 8L Engine Compartment 408 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 409 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 410 Bl Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs ls k b sem bene hs 410 Bl Replacement Parts 412 H Dealer Service nananana es 412 Bl Maintenance Procedures n on aaa aaa aaa aaa 412 Engine Ol 2 0 0 ese 413 Engine Oil Filter serere ee 415 Drive Belt 5 civic bs xk 9 RR n es 416 Spark PUSS cocos so Dare Feet Engine Air Cleaner Filter Catalytic Converter 000000 Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance 420 Power Steering Fluid Check 423 Front Suspension Ball Joints 423 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Steering Shaft Seal ae ee n 423
251. isc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE EBjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK b
252. istribution you receive from that mode 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Panel Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Bi Level Mode Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Mode uf Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Mode Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Mode W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed This de humidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT
253. ith a child restraint only It should not be used for any other purpose Before use inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks abrasions discoloration and loose threads If these or any other condition that might effect the performance of the strap is observed DO NOT USE personal injury may result Contact your local DaimlerChrysler dealership for a replacement part ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
254. ither momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up e It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster airbag warning light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Front and Side Impact Sensors Impact Sensors trigger airbag deployment in direct fron tal offset and side impacts and aid the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC in determining appropriate re sponse to impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Rollover Sensors Rollover Sensors trigger airbag deployment in the event of vehicle rollover and aid the ORC in deploying Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for rollover events DE Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped The ORC the SABIC during collision with other vehicles and during collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the vehicle such as collisions with poles trees or similar objects It will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side o
255. k buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training Gate Operator Canadian Programming button The name and color of the button may vary by Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig manufacturer nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming step after the Learn button has been pressed 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming Home
256. ke control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information es STARTING AND OPERATING 373 EXAMPLE ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT i FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION CORRECT gmasoat Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System 374 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to as
257. ker Lights 1 Access to change the Park Turn Signal or Side Marker bulb is from the rear of the headlight housing 2 Twist the turn signal or Side Marker socket to remove from the headlight module and pull bulb from socket 3 Replace the bulb and reinstall socket Fog Lights NOTE Access to the lights through the lower fascia cutout is limited We recommend you access the lights by turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove the inner fender shield 1 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector 1 4 turn counter clockwise and remove it from the fog light housing 2 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 3 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog light housing and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clockwise to lock it in place Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker and Backup Lights 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove lamp by removing two 10 mm bolts from the inboard side Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard side to dislodge tow ball studs 81c42d0f Remove two 10 mm bolts NOTE e f a screwdriver is used make sure a soft material is placed between boy and tool so not to scratch th
258. l special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate NOTE Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the FOBIK Insert a small flat bladed screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Remote start conveniently starts the engine from outside the vehicle by using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE Fob BATTERY ACCESS DOOR ae while maintaining security The system has a targeted range of 328 ft 100 m In order to remote start your vehicle the hood liftgate and all the doors must be closed and the transmission in Park FOBIK Battery Replacement NOTE Remote start requires automatic transaxle equipped vehicles 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 2 To remote start your vehicle press the RE MOTE START button on the key fob twice within three seconds To indicate that the ve hicle is about to start the parking lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly Remote Start FOBIK
259. l 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names mH e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension mm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten
260. l spacer through the center of the wheel and spare tire cover assembly so that the two retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on the opposite side 398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION 4 Using the winch T handle rotate the drive nut to the right until the compact spare tire cover assembly is The compact spare tire cover assembly must be used drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle when the compact spare tire is stored Failure to use 5 Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear this cover could drastically reduce the life of the the winch mechanism click three times It cannot be compact spare tire overtightened Check under the vehicle to ensure the compact spare tire cover assembly is positioned cor WARNING rectly against the underside of the vehicle CAUTION Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer have been properly extended through the center of For vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating the the wheel and spare tire cover assembly Failure to Winch Mechanism is designed specifically to stow a properly engage both retainer tabs could result in loss of the spare tire amp cover assembly which will cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of control of the vehicle COMPACT Spare Tire ONLY Do not attempt to use the Winch to stow the Full Size Flat Tire or any other Full Size Tire Vehicle damage may result ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399 JUMP
261. ld slide under the seat belt and be seriously or fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Manual Lumbar If Equipped The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard side of the seat To increase the support rotate the handle down To decrease the support rotate the handle up wards 81bd1649 Manual Lumbar Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Stow n Go Seating If Equipped On vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating the second and third row seats may be folded into the floor for convenient storage To Fold Second Row Seats 1 Lower the head restraints and raise the armrests on the second row seat 2 Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the Locked position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover Bibdi664 Stow n Go Seat Details 1 Storage Bin Latch 2 Mesh Storage Pocket 3 Seat Back Release Lever 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Storage Bin Cover Lock Release 3 Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down To assure the seatback is latched in the folded position additional downward pressure on the seatback may be required when folding Second Row Seatback Release Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 4 Pull rearward on the release strap located at the rear of CAUTION the seat and tumble the
262. le 342 Reporting Safety Defects 040 473 HO 494 INDEX MM Resetting Oil Change Indicator 226 Restraint Head see is ei eae aed e ED e 131 Restraints Child 0 0 00 00 eee 77 84 Restraints Infant 0 0 0 00 cee eee nee 78 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 0 401 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 212 Rotation Tires o 0 0 eee 345 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 91 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 92 Safety Defects Reporting 04 473 Safety Exhaust Gas 0 0 0 0 0000 50 89 Safety Information Tire 0 327 Safety TIPS iiis as ae ad She ee a ea 89 Satellite Radio 265 266 268 269 276 Satellite Radio Antenna llle 277 Schedule Maintenance llle 462 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 0000005 443 Seat Belt Reminder lees 62 Seat Bels ee RR ae EERE s 54 91 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 0 60 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 60 And Pregnant Women lessen 63 Child Restraint llle 77 80 Extender iui iue v uo hoe VR Re M do 63 Front Seat dec ek ER RR SER S 55 Inspection 2 6 6 pai eame g pan n E a 91 Pretensioners ersattes piri isitadi 61 Rear Seat om rre aa RS ER RU AS 55 Mats used ub Wr ERE RE bees adadsaiees 129 Adjustment isses ge ke dere bas 129 Cleaning dise des dio Pee ER hone e
263. le in a rearward position This is accomplished by lifting the upper most latch at the front of the console This provides easy access to the storage area below and provides two of the four cup holders for the second row passengers SSeS Console Position 2 Console Position 3 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost e Pulling up on the top storage tray gains access to the position Again lifting second latch handle at the front of top storage area the console allows complete access to a lower storage bin and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers e The first storage bin can be used to hold smaller items e The lower storage bin includes a molded in coin holder room for CD s DVD s and a power outlet that allows a cell phone to recharge while concealed Removal of Premium Floor Console To remove the console e Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the console e Lift the rear of the console up several inches e Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove console Console Position 4 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 To reinstall the console Position the console at a slight angle rear slightly higher than the front Slide the console forward into the floor bracket Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting on the floor bracket Push down on the rear of the console until it
264. lees 415 Identification Logo 1 eee 414 Materials Added to 0 000000 0G 415 Recommendation 414 457 DYMINGUC queue sea cdot aay Che werels oe 415 ViscoSity cec t e ey eed e 414 457 Onboard Diagnostic System iis 409 410 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 184 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0 98 99 OVGFrdriVe 2 iho e hd oa BEER Re UE S 317 Overhead Console llle 181 Overhead Travel Information Center 181 Overheating Engine 05 222 387 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 474 Panic Alarm uuuuweacek x x noe oS ROS RR Reo 25 Park Sense System Rear 0040 166 Parking Brake uk es er bre rd e end 317 Parking On Hill 21k eR eager ee ba 318 Passing Light llle 163 165 Pedals Adjustable llle 170 Pets Transporting 0 6 6 eee eee eee 85 Phone Cellular 0 0 102 268 269 Phone Hands Free UConnect 102 268 269 Placard Tire and Loading Information 331 Port Universal Serial Bus USB 265 268 USB 254r Re mex PEE UE qs 265 268 Power Brakes ibo E eee ae eS WR R Pd 319 Distribution Center Fuses lle 444 Door Locks i3210naga4 BER OE REESE R 32 ili a re E 48 Mitros zuccku ere pU basse aS eae ae ae ee e 101 en INDEX 493 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 192 Seals cud geboren veu bh DO E 130 Sliding Door Ji day
265. ler cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled 362 STARTING AND OPERATING BEBE e If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible See Section 7 of this manual for more information FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 3L ENGINES ONLY E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by the unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 Decal and or fuel filler door label can operate on E 85 en STARTING AND OPERATING 363 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame im 5 Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with E 85 Badge an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of ETHANOL FUEL E 85 these two E 85 is a mixture of approxim
266. lso disarm if the vehicle is started with a FOB Integrated Key FOBIK To exit alarming mode press the transmitter Unlock button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occurs disarm the system Tamper Alert If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door using either a mechanical key or FOBIK the alarm has been activated Check the vehicle for tampering Security System Manual Override The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless entry transmitter or open the doors This feature is only available if you have Remote Keyless Entry The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console door courtesy and liftgate lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme top position e The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTIN
267. luid Level Check The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing underhood services or immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 WARNING e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling point than the recommended MOPAR DOT 3 product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the
268. ly secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GIW 3 GAWR 380 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor This requirement may limit the ability to always mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires percentage of total trailer weight with a higher load carrying capaci
269. ly when the primary control for the rear blower is in the REAR position do the second seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed Manual Rear Zone Climate Control If Equipped The Manual Rear Zone Climate Control system has floor air outlets to the rear of the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and upper outlets The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear seat passengers are located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle 81bc4f92 Rear HVAC Manual Controls 3 Rear HVAC Lock 4 Mode Control 1 Blower Control 2 Temperature Control Rear Blower Control The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the RR position do the second seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed The rear blower control located in the rear overhead console has an OFF position and a range of blower speeds This allows the second seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle CAUTION Interior air enters the Manual Rear Zone Climate Control system through an intake grille located in the passenger side trim panel behind the third seat The heater outlets are located in the passenger side trim
270. ment panel cupholders are located in a pull out drawer just below the climate controls Front Cupholders Pull the drawer out firmly and place the container to be held in one of the cupholder wells The line is designer to accommodate a wide variety of container types and sizes Press down on the container to engage the cup holder retention features es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 Bottle Holders Four bottle holders are located in the interior One bottle holder on both front and side sliding doors Each holder accommodates up to 20 oz size plastic bottles Two outboard mesh pockets on intermediate seating The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes toys games or MP3 players etc Optional Smoker s Package Kit With the optional dealer installed Smoker s Package a removable ash receiver is inserted into one of the cup holder wells To install the ash receiver align the receiver so the thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward Press the ash receiver into either of the cup wells to secure Pull upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning and or storage The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom modate a second ash receiver if desired CONSOLE FEATURES There are two consoles available Basic and Premium Basic Console Features e The base console allows vehicle occupants to easily pass through the first row to the second e 4 Cup Holders accept up to extra large siz
271. mited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than 60 mph 100 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual for additional information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed en STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators a
272. mmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for dealer replacement of Fobs Duplication of Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming procedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Fob is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle Fobs with you to the dealer Customer Key Fob Programming If you have two valid sentry keys you can program new sentry keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 2 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicato
273. more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Tur
274. ms securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been exceeded es STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Example Only Front Rear Axle Axle Empty Weight 2 140 Ibs 1 470 Ibs 971 kg 667 kg Load Including driver pas 360 Ibs 980 lbs sengers and cargo 163 kg 445 kg Total 2 500 Ibs 2 450 lbs 1 134 kg 1 111 kg GAWR 2 544 Ibs 2 544 Ibs 1 154 kg 1 154 kg 89 55 A TRAILER TOWING Example Only GVWR 5050 Ibs 2 291 kg In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible 370 STARTING AND OPERATING EE To maintain warranty coverage follow the
275. multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify
276. mum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the menu button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Radio Mode Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above proc
277. n and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located over the head and slightly behind the passenger Pull this strap down and secure it to the latch plate of the lap belt and then snap into the buckle Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seats and the second row outboard seats the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by pushing anywhere on the anchorage To move the an chorage downward press the actuation button while simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem bly As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Automatic Locki
278. n in AM or FM frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UCon nect message will display on the radio screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UCon nect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will beg
279. n the compact spare tire cover assembly is clear of the vehicle stand the tire cover assembly upright and remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the two retaining tabs together Squeezing Winch Retainer Tabs 5 There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the body These locations are on the sill flange of the body and consist of a pair of down standing tabs The jack is to be located engaging the flange between the pair of tabs closest to the wheel to be changed Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is properly engaged in the described location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 81bc524c Jack Location EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395 CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in step 5 6 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 7 Remove the wheel lug nuts for vehicles with wheel covers remove the cover from the wheel by hand Do not
280. n the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag In an accident a passenger airbag may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants riding in rear facing infant restraints Restraining Infants and Small Children with Seat Delete Feature Commercial Vehicles Only There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Use the restraint that is correct for your child e The rearward facing infant carrier is for babies weigh ing up to about 20 lbs 9 kg and less than one year old THIS TYPE OF SEAT CANNOT BE USED IN A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DE LETE FEATURE Commercial Vehicles Only The forward facing child seat is for children from about 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and more than one year old A convertible child seat one that is designed to be used for children who are too heavy for a rear facing infant seat may be used IN THE FORWARD FACING POSITION ONLY IT MUST NEVER BE INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE Com mercial Vehicles Only When a convertible seat is properly installed forward facing the vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most position Children more than 40 Ibs 18 kg should be secured in the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the rear most position Older children who do not
281. n the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the Music Type button to sele
282. nchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE COMMERCIAL VEHICLES ONLY IF EQUIPPED Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children in the front passenger seat However if you must carry a child in a vehicle without a rear seat the passenger seat should be moved to the full rearward position and the child must be in a proper restraint system based on it s age size and weight NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in a vehicle without rear seats In an accident serious injury or death may occur from the deploying passenger air bag This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger seat Use this tether anchor to secure only forward facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether strap 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Rear Facing Infant restraints must never be secured i
283. nd backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic STARTING AND OPERATING 383 Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in section 8 of this manual for trans mission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing 384 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral but do not increase engine idle s
284. nd boot 24 000 40 000 24 seals replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50 000 30 466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police 60 000 100 000 60 taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary 90 000 150 000 90 Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 170 000 60 Replace the ignition cables on 3 3L 3 8L engines 102 000 170 000 102 Replace the spark plugs on 3 3L 3 8L engines 102 000 170 000 102 Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter 120 000 200 000 120 Replace Accessory Drive Belt s 120 000 200 000 120 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For
285. ndows and es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 e dry weather condition Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness tion can generally be re established by switching the to a large degree rely on the phone and network and phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain not the UConnect system in Bluetooth on mode mm e operation from driver seat e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering Power Up the in vehicle audio volume After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system compromised with the convertible top down 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu English Francais Last Enter Number Soe See Setup Phonebook Number on Phone Flowchart Flowchart is redialed Number The 32 name language associated Number specific phonebook will be with entry is Dialed used The phones paired is dialed are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Y
286. next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for 8 seconds before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist Song Title and Composer if available information Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to
287. ng Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints
288. ng System The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials inner push knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 81c2cd2b Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Front Blower Control There are four blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribu tion You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air d
289. ng items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 378 STARTING AND OPERATING EE NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings EN STARTING AND OPERATING 379 WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not ful
290. ngerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 372 STARTING AND OPERATING EE A weight distributing syste A weight distributing system works by applying lever RENS age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and bra
291. nterval has expired if the rear window defogger switch is pressed to the on position again during the same ignition cycle the system will automatically turn off after about 5 minutes NOTE You may turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime by pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time CAUTION To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 00 00 0 309 W Automatic Transmission 313 Automatic Transmission s 310 Brake Transmission Interlock System Normal Starting Above 32 F 0 C 310 Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock Extremely Cold Weather Starting Below 20 F DYSICMN UL im dee Carb he og d wh eae aont Sa n 2299 C eiua pu Re drea ote APA t I e PS 310 Automatic Transmission s High Altitude Starting Above 4 000 Ft lg Parking Brake 1 eee 317 Gt A NOELLE AD EIR AMEND om W Brake Syste ss cosi Rer 3a R3 E Rn 319 If Engine Fails To Start 311 Anti Lock Brake System If Equipped 319 After Starting us b De es pints rres 312 Bl Traction Control TCS If Equipped
292. ntinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lockup and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY Ds AND STANDARDS TP MM TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H STARTING AND OPERATING 327 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design stan
293. number after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example in USA 234 567 890 is nine digits long wh
294. ny evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure Fuel System Connections The Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel system s hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deteriorated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufacture specified hoses with quick connect fittings or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing It is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick connect fittings that have been removed during service Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings to insure they are properly installed and fully connected See your authorized dealer for service ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 Brakes In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte nance Schedules WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake And Power Steering Hoses When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking
295. o about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position e Rearward facing child seats and infant carriers must NEVER be used while the second row Swivel n Go seats are in the rearward facing position WARNING Never place any child seat or infant carrier in the Swivel n Go seat while it is in the rearward facing position The swivel seat should be locked in the forward position when using any child seat or infant carriers with the vehicle in motion Failure to do so could result in serious injury or even death Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder
296. o the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Each vehicle except commercial cargo vehicles is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Two LATCH child restraint anchor Latch Anchorages age systems are installed on all second row seats and in When using the tether anchorages in the outboard seat the center position on all 3rd row fold in floor seats ing positions ensure that the strap is routed over the top Second row seats also feature tether strap anchorages of the seatback and the head restraint located in the rear surface of the seatback In addition all third row fold in floor seats are equipped with a child restraint tether anchor at the center seating position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 81bc37e8 Tether Strap Mounting When using the tether anchorages in the center position on third row fold in floor seating ensure that the strap is routed over the top of the seatback and the head restraint WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to
297. o the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and all objects from the window path before closing 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Auto Up Reset Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the auto up function will be disabled To reactivate the auto up feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an addition
298. oad Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 475 e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Call Toll Free at Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations e 1 800 890 4038 U S these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer acc Aa controlled vehicle systems and features They show Or exactly how to find and correct problems the first time i using step by step troubleshooting and driveability VASTE ADONE PE Worl Wide Neo ae procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com pealtocis and a e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals e Owner s Manuals These manuals have been pr
299. om the vehicle to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door if equipped ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 NOTE e After setting the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e The power sliding door switches will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h e The power sliding door will operate from the remote keyless entry transmitter if the vehicle is in Park regardless of the child lock lever position LIFTGATE On vehicles equipped with power locks the liftgate can be unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by activat ing the power door lock switches located on the front doors To open the liftgate depress the liftgate release handle located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion Liftgate Handle 81bc38a8 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate pressing the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will result in the liftgate becom ing unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter Press the button on the remote ke
300. om the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recogni tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System U
301. ommand when you are asked for it For press of the Phone button on the radio control head example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual The UCon nect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin
302. on as possible if this occurs 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 16 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi awe tion If the engine is critically hot a continuous chime will sound for 4 minutes After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light turns off 17 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is re quired and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 18 Oil Pressure Warning Light S27 This light shows low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the
303. on mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad ditives Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Drive Belt At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule replace
304. onds or until the lever is released and the wipers will cycle three times NOTE If the Multifunction Lever is depressed while in the delay range the wipers will operate for several seconds after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the Multifunction Lever is depressed while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for approximately two wipe cycles then turn OFF 2 Intermittent Low and High Speed Wipers Use the intermittent wipers when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the Multifunction Lever to the first detent position then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 20 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 2 seconds The time delay will be doubled if the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph 16 km h Low Speed is achieved by rotating the Multifunction Lever past the intermittent settings to the first detent High Speed is achieved by rotating the Multifunction Lever past the intermittent settings to the second detent 3 Rear Window Functions Rotating the Rotary Ring to the first detent activates the rear intermittent wipers To activate the washers rotate the Rotary Ring fully forward and the washers will spray until the ring is released and then resume the intermittent interval NOTE Rear Window Wipers are
305. or UConnect system operating instructions for this radio UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See UConnect website for sup ported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following web sites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phone book enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without w
306. ormal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as Carbon Monoxide Warnings octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol WARNING Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly the tesponsibilitw ot The qmanufactaret Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monox P y ide poisoning NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control Do nd spat 2 They spend Bern a monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill systems can result in civil penalties being assessed Never run the engine in a closed area such as a against you garage and never sit in a parked vehicle
307. ost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Rear Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped The Rear Automatic Temperature Control System has floor air outlets to the rear of the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool dehumidified air through the head liner outlets 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The REAR SYSTEM control for the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System is on the front ATC control unit located on the instrument panel Pressing the REAR LOCK button for the Rear Auto matic Temperature Control System from the front ATC control unit illuminates a LOCK symbol in the rear display The rear temperature and air source are con trolled from the front ATC control unit Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the REAR LOCK button is turned off The Rear Automatic Temperature Control System is located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle 81bc4f84 Rear HVAC ATC Controls 3 Rear HVAC Lock 4 Mode Control 1 Blower Control 2 Temperature Control Operation of the rear system is quite simple 1 Press the REAR LOCK button on the front ATC control unit This turns off t
308. ottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pres su
309. ow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP BAS Warning Lamp The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with BAS The ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the
310. panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control When the blower knob on the front climate control unit is set to any position other than RR the rear temperature selection follows the setting of the rear temperature control knob on the front climate control unit The rear mode selection follows the setting of the rear mode control knob To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle press the temperature control button down for cold and up for heated air When rear controls are locked by the front system the lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated When the temperature knob is in the cold position cold air will be delivered from the headliner outlets As the rear temperature knob is turned towards hot the air will get warmer and the air will be delivered from both the 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME headliner and floor outlets When the rear temperature knob reaches the full hot position all of the air will be delivered from the floor outlets Rear Mode Control Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets Bi Level Mode v Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the Bi Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and
311. peed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE Flat towing with all four wheels on the ground Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flasher 386 H If Your Engine Overheats 387 H Jacking And Tire Changing 388 Jacking Instructions 00004 389 Mi Jump Starting Procedure 00 399 H Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 401 Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle 402 With Ignition Key 0 000000 Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Griound iclrru Rea eee eee a Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 0 000000 386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel above the radio 81bc4f88 RT 3 SWITCH BANK 1 Hazard Button 2 PAD Warning Light 3 ESP OFF Switc
312. peed is above 0 mph 0 km h e If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc tions within the same cycle the system will automati cally stop and must be opened or closed manually WARNING You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the sliding door Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door Power Sliding Door Master Lock If Equipped The power sliding door may also be opened by pressing the switches on the overhead console or the switch located on the trim panel just in front of the sliding door To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the sliding door locks may be overrid den by pressing ON using the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front overhead console next to the driver 81 bbf7ac 1 Left Sliding Door Switch 2 Power Liftgate 3 Right Sliding Door Switch 4 Sliding Door Master Lock ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the sliding doors are equipped with a child protection door lock system NOTE When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock To activate the system 1 Open the sliding door 2 Slide the child lock control inward towa
313. plied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 9 Tachometer Premium Instrument Cluster Only The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 10 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transaxle gear selection NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from Park 11 OdometerlTrip Odometer If Equipped The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometer press the Trip Odometer button 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME To reset a trip odometer display the desired trip odom eter to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets approximately 2 seconds 12 PRNDL Odometer Display Area CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required CRU
314. problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained 24 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gallons 7 8 liters this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and d inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability NOTE Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s re
315. ptible to stone breakage than glass headlights ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt
316. pull to the left Or right Alignment will not correct this condition See your dealer Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having f adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire for proper diagnosis failure and loss of vehicle control 344 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration CAUTION Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the follow avoid tire cupping and spotty wear ing precautions Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and TIRE CHAINS other suspension components it is important that only Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet chains in good condition are used Broken chains can p B ee i cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain the damaged parts of the chain before further use manufacturer Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire Do not exceed 45 mph 70 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle If chains are used on an All Wheel Drive AWD vehicle they shoul
317. r Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 3 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro cedure Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle with out the FOB Integrated
318. r Folding Seat adjusts to the following positions using the switch bank located on the left rear trim panel 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The Third Row Power Seat system includes obstacle detection for safe operation When the system detects an obstacle the motors will stop and reverse the motion for a brief period Should this occur remove the obstacle and repress the button again for the desired position To Fold Third Row Seats Manually If Equipped 1 Lower the head restraint to its full down position 2 Pull release strap marked 1 located on the rear of the seat to lower the seatback 3 Pull release strap marked 2 to release the anchors Folding 3rd Row Seat Strap 4 Pull release strap marked 3 and tumble the seat rearward into the storage bin es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 To Unfold Third Row Seats 1 Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors latch 2 Pull release strap marked 1 to unlock the recliner 3 Pull release strap marked 3 to return the seatback to its full upright position 4 Adjust the head restraint to the desired position WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched Tailgate Mode 1 Pull release strap 2 then pull rel
319. r main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes redial previous record again ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration SEATS Manual Front amp Second Row Seat Adjuster dod The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat Manual Seat Adjuster Pull the bar up and move the seat to the desired position Using body pressure MOVE forward and rearward on the Release the bar to lock the seat into position seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured 8 Way Driver s Power Seat If Equipped T
320. r out of P Park you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the transmission shift lever is locked in the P Park position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Further more you should never leave children or pets unat tended inside a vehicle steering wheel and shift lever are released Other wise damage to the steering column or shifter could result The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P Park position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 R Reverse Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop N Neutral Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop D Overdrive The transmission has only PRND shift positions Down shifts are carried out by electronic range select The Instrument Cluster will show gear selection as 5 4 3 2 1 for 6 speed and 3 2 1 for 4 speed PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch on the brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the gear selector in the Park position To release the parking brake depres
321. r the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow Operating Tips WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Hot weather and e blai Den he m ntrol vehicle interior is very Set the mode control to on and blower on high Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out shies the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort Turn ro on and set the mode control to the position gt e Cool Sunny Operate in x position Cool amp Humid conditions e bg Set the mode control to 4 if and turn on ri Jes 66 46 to keep windows clear Set the mode control to the 1 position If windshield Cold Weather fogging starts to occur move the control towards the We position 8000cb71 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 A C Air Filter If Equipped On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con trol ATC the climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air Refer to section 7 Air Conditioning for filter replacement instructions ELECTRIC REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER IF EQUIPPED 8 Press this button located on your front climate control to turn on the rear window defroster and the optional heated mirrors A light will show that the defroster is on The defroster automatically turns off after about 10 minutes of operation as long as the ignition switch is in the RUN position After the initial time i
322. r washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean then Mopar Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Man
323. radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the 340 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this li
324. rd Row Power Seat If Equipped The third row power seat offers the following features e The seatbacks can be folded forward for additional cargo space if needed e Head restraints can be stowed with the seat Second Row Seatback Release Lever 4 Close the storage bin cover and adjust the head e Tailgate mode flips the seat rearward to face out the restraint to the desired position tailgate 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The power recline feature located on the side of the seat cushion adjusts the seatback angle forward rearward WARNING for occupant comfort To avoid serious injury or death never operate the vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in the tailgate mode Remote Third Row Power Seat Switch If Equipped A One Touch Third Row Power Folding Seat switch is located in the left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank Third Row Power Seat Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 81bd1665 One Touch Folding Seat Third Row 1 Opens seats to NORMAL seating position 2 STOWS seats into floor The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and 8 Positions seat into Tailgate Mode unfolding positions for the third row seats 4 Folds seatbacks flat m 5 RIGHT LEFT seats operate individuall Left and right third row seats can be folded individually 5 BOTH seats operate ageer T or together The One Touch Third Row Powe
325. rd the ve hicle to engage the Child Protection Door Lock g serene Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door NOTE e After engaging the child protection door lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See e When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle remote RE keyless entry transmitter switches on the overhead console or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position To avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a colli sion Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened from the outside door handle or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power e The power sliding door will operate from the switches sliding door when the child protection locks are located on the trim panel just in front of the power engaged sliding door regardless of the child lock lever position To avoid unintentional operation of the power slid ing door from the rear seats press the ON Master Lock Out Switch located in the front overhead con 1 Open the sliding door sole next to the driver to disable the switches for the rear seat passengers To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock 2 Slide the child lock control outward away fr
326. re in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found
327. re size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR 368 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose ite
328. re tested for leaks Maintain coolant concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any heat source or moving component which may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immediately if there is a
329. rear seat According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil dren LATCH later in this section The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up t
330. reen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ radios only with UConnect For sales code REN touch screen radio refer to the separate User s Manual This feature allows you to plug in an iPod mobile digital device into the vehicle s sound system through a connec tor UCI connector using an optional connection cable available through Mopar See your authorized dealer for details Using this feature e the iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Track Title Artist Al bum etc information display on radio e the iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod
331. rent playing track SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button will play the first 5 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the desired track press the SCAN button again During the SCAN mode you can also press the SEEK button to the left or right to go to the previous or next tracks ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 RND Random Button RES Radios Only Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle on and shuffle off modes of the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is on List or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the following buttons will take you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod device TUNE SCROLL Knob In the List mode the TUNE SCROLL knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod Turning the TUNE SCROLL knob clockwise forward and counter clockwise backward scrolls through lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE SCROLL knob to select and start playing the track By turning the TUNE SCROLL knob fast you can jump through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display During all Li
332. res which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the Auto mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS ua Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its road worthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl A Word About Your Keys 0 13 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 13 FOB With Integrated Key sess 14 Tip Start Feature esce e oe OS 15 Ignition Key Removal sess 15 Key In Ignition Reminder 16 Locking Door With The Key 16 Sentry Key ACC 17 Replacement Keys llle 18 Customer Key FOB Programming 18 General Information llle 19 li Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped 20 If You Wish To Manually Lock
333. ressor Move the temperature control knob to the desired temperature Air Conditioning Operation Use this button to engage the Air Conditioning A lamp will illuminate when the Air Con ditioning System is engaged 81b9dd53 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculate but tons at the same time Three Zone Basic Temperature Control If Equipped With the Three Zone Basic Temperature Control System each front seat occupant can independently control the temperature of air coming from the outlets on their side of the vehicle es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 The Three Zone Basic Temperature Control lower panel controls rear HVAC operations 81b9ea8d Top Panel Controls 81bc4f90 1 Left Front Temp Control 7 Right Front Temp Control 2 Panel Mode 8 Rear Window Defrost Bottom Panel Controls 3 Bi Level Mode 9 Recirculation Mode 4 Front Blower 10 Mix Mode 1 Left Front Heated Seat 3 Rear Temp Control 5 Air Conditioning Mode 11 Floor Mode 2 Rear Blower 4 Right Front Heated Seat 6 Windshield Defrost The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The front climate control unit has five positions OFF REAR and a range of blower speeds On
334. restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle Installing the Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH a
335. rim panel behind the third seat The heater outlets are located in the passenger side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle press the temperature control button down for cold and up for heated air When rear controls are locked by the front system the lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated Rear Mode Control Auto Mode The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu pants Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets Bi Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the Bi Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 Headliner Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vane knob on the outlets to one side will shut off the air flow Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against eng
336. rity At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 471 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date
337. rity telltale ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 will flash The engine will run only if a valid FOB Integrated Key FOBIK is used to start the vehicle Use of the FOBIK will disable the alarm Rearming of the System If Equipped The security system will rearm itself after the 15 addi tional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing if the system has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present the system will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition To Arm the System The alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the SECURITY light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the system is arming The security light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed NOTE If the SECURITY light stays on continuously during vehicle operation have the system checked by your dealer To Disarm the System Use FOBIK to unlock the door If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors and the security lamp will flash for 30 seconds Check the vehicle for tamper ing The Security system will a
338. river can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM can not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the
339. rocedure 13 Odometer Display Reset Button To reset a message display gATE gASCAP noFUSE CHAngE OIL LoCOOL LoWASH push and hold the button until the display resets approximately 2 seconds 14 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If Equipped If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS if equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 15 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system it called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illu minate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as so
340. rol knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for Voice Command Tree the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section pane Help Command e For certain operations compound commands can be If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to used For example instead of saying Setup and then know your options at any prompt say Help following Phone Pairing the following compound command the beep The UConnect system will play all the options can be said Setup Phone Pairing at any prompt if you ask for help e For each feature explanation in this section only the To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press combined form of the voice command is given You the Phone button and follow audible prompts for can also break the commands into parts and say each directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a part of the c
341. rom you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e fully closed windows e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be PE spoken eight zero zero e dry weather condition P 5 e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be e When navigating through an automated system such compromised with the convertible top down as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Far End Audio Performance e Storing names in phone book when vehicle is notin e Audio quality is maximized under motion is recommended low to medium blower setting e It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phone book low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e UConnect phone book nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phone book smooth road surface fully closed wi
342. ront blower rocker button The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode The operator can also select the direction of the selecting one of the following positions 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vane knob on the center outlets down will close off the air flow from the center outlets The thumb wheel next to the outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off the air flow from these outlets Bi Level Mode Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost A slight amount of air is also directed through the side window demister outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the Bi Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode uf Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode qt e Air comes from the floor defrost and side window x demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and si
343. ror Wah DLE WASED PWR FOLD MIR as M31 u 20Amp Back Up Lamps B U Compass COMES Yellow LAMPS M35 E 10 Amp Heated Mirrors M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Bed Red Controller ORC TT M36 E 20 Amp Power Outlet 3 EUROPE Yellow BATT M33 10 Amp Next Generation Con M37 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Red troller NGC Global Red tem ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP Stop Lamp Switch STP LP SW Fuel Pump Rly Hi Control ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 Cartridge Mini m CAUTION Cavity Fuse Fise Description M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors e When installing the Integrated Power Module Natural LOCK UNLOCK cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop MTRS erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in a electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN The Heated Mirrors Lower Instrument Panel Power Outlet and Removable Floor Console when in the front position are fused with self resetting fuses that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer The po
344. rovide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is equipped the side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be trig gered However even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old mu
345. ruck by a deploying 2n 20 passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or injury to the infant slouching can move the belt out of position Never place any child seat or infant carrier in the Swivel n Go seat while it is in the rearward facing e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the position The swivel seat should be locked in the child closer to the center of the vehicle If this doesn t forward position when using any child seat or infant help move the child to the center rear seating position penc s the vehicle in motion E do so and use the lap belt Never allow a child to put the pica E ae m or even death i h ccupants riding in Swivel n Go seating must be Shoulder Belt undar an ari ot behind dew back wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked NOTE For additional information refer to in either the forward or rearward position Failure to do so could result in serious injury or even death www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropri
346. ructure Each airbag features inflated chambers place adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy during an impact severe enough to require airbag occupant protection WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury If your vehicle is equipped with left and right curtain airbags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts Along with seat belts and pretensioners front airbags work with the knee bolsters to p
347. s 442 Easy Entty iik eed RR RUE EROR te 144 Fold in Floor Stow n Go iius 135 Lledted ada tenera GMa aba E DAE 9 132 Lumbar Support reses ecl e Rm 134 Memory sce aces RR eoe dos a RR EAST Ro 151 Powet i e ee mop ea rue we EUR SR 130 nn INDEX 495 Reclining exem teo RRR GR RR 133 Stow n Go Fold in Floor 135 TII seus ite aget ipa Sig fa ere anaes as 144 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 20 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 428 458 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 17 Sentry Key Programming 000 18 Sentry Key Replacement 18 Service Assistance eee eee ee 470 Service Contract xc owas dear ows ILE aes 472 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction INGICAtOL cto shes Re eR aE eee es 227 Service Manuals eee eee 474 Setting the Clock 0040 239 255 266 270 Shoulder Belts 0 0 ee eee eee 55 Signals T tft 3 9 saga wae dcr 92 162 223 454 455 Sliding DOO sse 25e 44 PORE PAG Eb Pass A1 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 324 Snow Chains Tire Chains 344 ono uii gon A eee ave Ha ee eas he Bec a 345 Sound Systems Radio 265 268 spare me uk ve ke alae ba daw wa ae 339 390 Spark PIUS i deb s RR eee done 42 416 Speed Control Cruise Control 171 Speedometer qui ebay dea et see awe Haak 223 Starting iss da Se ye ere eee ets 309
348. s To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push WARNING the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into excess fuel in case the engine is flooded the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery nave mnou ii S Ye nace in another vehicle This type of start can be dan released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the this manual for proper jump starting procedures accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running and follow them carefully smoo
349. s eere ane eer beo 42 Steering ases s esppibser x ene der wh bs 323 Steering Checking lille 423 Sunroof cue koe EYE GUERRE XN A 190 WindlOWS i5 uda ea hee CORO ava ex 36 Power Steering Fluid leise 459 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 63 Preparation for Jacking 06 389 Pretensioners Seat Bells sa ciue sheer RR REDE RA ET 61 Radial Ply Tires capussat RR ORAE ERR us 338 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 428 429 Radio Broadcast Signals 04 236 Radio Navigation 0 0 000 isesi 268 Radio Operation 00 266 269 282 Radio Remote Controls 0 000005 282 Radio Satellite 265 266 268 269 276 Radio Sound Systems 0 265 268 Rear Air Conditioning 290 297 Rear Heater ss ss od odor 4 ehe 4 eG hoes 290 Rear Park Sense System 00005 166 Rear Window Defroster 004 303 Rearview Mirrors 1 6 eee 98 Reclining Front Seats 0 000000 133 Recorder Event Data llle 75 Recreational Towing 2050 384 403 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 00 0c eee 62 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 23 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 282 Remote Starting System llle 29 Removable Floor Console 202 208 Replacement Keys llle 18 Replacement Parts oasis eei eda 412 Replacement Tires ll
350. s the emergency break pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage Parking Brake Lever 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the gear shift lever is in the PARK position When WARNING parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the gear shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out of PARK e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in Park a manual transmission in Reverse or first gear Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes en STARTING AND OPERATING 319 When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in th
351. s the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in 2 minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the
352. s used to help drivers determine if an obstacle is in the way of the vehicle while it is backing up in addition to the use of inside rearview and outside mirrors es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 When the driver selects Reverse the system scans for The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red objects behind the vehicle using four sensors located in LEDs one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the rear bumper Objects can be detected from up to 59 the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind inches 150 cm A warning display above the rear the right rear of the vehicle The driver can view the LEDs window provides both visible and audible warnings either through the rear view mirror or by looking at the indicating the distance of the object display above the rear window NOTE The Rear Park Sense System will MUTE the radio if on when the audible warning is activated The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle Rear Park Sense Indicator 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES 8th LED 6 in 15 cm 12 in 30 cm Red DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 1st LED 59 in 150
353. s will allow more engine equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the user s safety or the safety of others Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M BAS Brake Assist System The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful d
354. se Button 5 Twist the pole in a clockwise rotation until it stops Note You will hear an audible click when the lock button engages the base 6 Place the table top over the installed pole aligning with the mating feature of the underside of the table top Apply pressure on the table tom and press downward Note You will hear an audible click when the table latch engages the pole WARNING Failure to comply with the following conditions could result in serious injury or even death e DO NOT install the table while vehicle is in motion NEVER drive the vehicle with only the pole in stalled DO NOT place heavy or sharp objects on table DO NOT place liquid drinks on the table use available cupholders Second Row seats must be locked in the rearward facing position before installing the table 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To separate the table top from the leg follow these steps 1 Locate the release latch on the underside of the table top 81bd165d Table Top Release 2 Pull horizontally on the latch to activate the release from the pole 3 While pulling on the latch pull upward to remove the table top from the pole NOTE The table top should be removed from the leg prior to removing the leg from its mounting base 4 Locate the release button on the pole Press the release button firmly to activate the release from the base 5 While pressing the release button twist
355. seat forward into the storage bin T e 4M NOTE The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks which have minimal clearance to the cover In an accident serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin cover open Keep the storage bin cover closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Second Row Seat Release Strap 5 Close the storage bin cover Do not operate the storage bin cover while the vehicle is in motion Do not use the storage bin latch as a tie down 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Unfold Second Row Seats 1 Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the Locked position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover 2 Pull up on the handle to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors Second Row Seat Release Handle 3 Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat to return the seatback to its full upright position es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Second Row Bench Seat If Equipped While the bench seat does not stow in the floor it is removable for added cargo space Rollers integrated into the seat frame ease removal through the rear Floor storage compartments are still available with the bench E seat Thi
356. second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than an inch a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a d
357. should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Inside Day Night Mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped When using this feature the mirror will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated d m Z 80975a32 MANUAL REARVIEW MIRROR es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Driver s Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer If Equipped a This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight B18c6212 glare from vehicles behind you You can turn this feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in a passenger side convex mirror will look
358. sing 173 ll Electronic Brake Control System 174 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 174 TCS Traction Control System 175 BAS Brake Assist System 176 ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation 177 ESP Electronic Stability Program 178 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee ESP BAS Warning Lamp Bl Overhead Consoles Front Overhead Consoles Courtesy Reading Lights As Equipped Sunglass Storage Rear Overhead Console If Equipped lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped Programming HomeLink Gate Operator Canadian Programming Using HomeLink Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button Security Troubleshooting Tips 181 181 182 183 183 184 185 187 Br General Information 189 ower Sunroof If Equipped 190 Opening Sunroof Manual 190 Opening Sunroof Express 190 Closing Sunroof Manual 190 Venting Sunroof Express 190 Closing Sunroof Express 190 Auto Sunroof Express With Anti Pinch Protections s siaip i ii aes enti ta nied Sages 191 Sunshade Operation cessere mimg tnes 191 Wind Buffeting 0 0 0 eee eee 191 Sunroof Maintenance
359. sist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra Heavy Duty All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 Engine Transmission GCWR Gross Com Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Tongue Wt bined Wt Rating Trailer Wt 3 3L amp 3 8L Auto 6 600 Ibs 2 993 kg 22 Sq Ft 2 0 Square Up to 2 persons amp 180 lbs 82 kg matic Meters Luggage 1 800 lbs 816 kg 6 600 Ibs 2 993 kg 22 Sq Ft 20 Square 3 to 5 persons amp 135 Ibs 61 kg Meters Luggage 1 350 Ibs 612 kg 6 600 Ibs 2 993 kg 22 Sq Ft 20 Square 6 to 7 persons amp 100 Ibs 45 kg Meters Luggage 1 000 Ibs 454 kg 376 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Engine Transmission GCWR Gross Com Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Tongue Wt bined Wt Rating
360. sponsi bility to maintain correct tire pressure even if underin flation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly NOTE Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that
361. ss accuracy the com pass variance should be properly set according to the compass variance map zone that the vehicle is in COMPASS VARIANCE MAP B040bf97 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sensor is located To Set the Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission in the P Park position Press and hold approximately ten sec onds the odometer trip odometer reset button until the current variance zone number is displayed To change the zone press and release the odometer trip odometer reset button to increment the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass Prior to calibrat ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME To Manually Calibrate the Compass Start the engine and leave the transmission in the P Park position Press and hold approximately 10 sec onds the odometer trip odometer reset button until the current variance zone number is displayed Release the odometer trip odometer reset button then press and hold again approximately 10 seconds until the
362. st be out of the ignition switch or the ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this feature to operate Park Lights DO Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent to turn the park lights on This also turns on all instrument panel lighting Headlights Turn the headlight switch knob to the 2nd AD detent to turn the headlights and park lights on This also turns on all instrument panel lighting To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the dimmer control up or down Dimmer Control 81bc85f0 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 With the park lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control for the interior lights on the instrument panel upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights Dome Light Position 81bc85ef Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent extreme top position to turn on the interior lights except the front reading courtesy lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Interior light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the OFF position extreme bottom The inte rior lights will remain off when the doors or liftgate are open 81bc85ec Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control to the first detent This feature brightens the odometer radio and ov
363. st modes the iPod will display all lists in wrap around mode So if the track you wish to select is at the bottom of the list you just turn the TUNE SCROLL knob backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster Radio Preset Buttons In the List mode the radio preset buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod device e 1 Playlists e 2 Artists e 3 Albums e 4 Genres 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e 5 Audiobooks e 6 Podcasts After pressing a preset button you will see the list you are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit the List mode without selecting a track press the same preset button again to go back to Play mode LIST Button Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu of the iPod This takes you to the same top level menu as on your iPod Turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and then press the TUNE SCROLL knob This will take you to the next sub menu list item of the iPod and you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE Button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod SATELLITE RADIO RSC IF EQUIPPED REN RER AND RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast
364. st ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to the section on Child Restraint You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 2 All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has side airbags do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean a
365. tch will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set push button CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the mm second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to balance the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio Manual Air Conditioning and Heati
366. te Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter and a valet key which stores in the rear of the Fob The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead The valet key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking To remove the valet key from the Fob slide the mechani cal latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out of the Fob with your other hand Valet Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided valet key into the lock cylinders with either side up 81bb182d ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running Ignition Key Removal Place the selector lever in P Park Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the key NOTE The power window switches radio power outlets and removable console if equipped will remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature WARNING NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri
367. tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Often fluid such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings Therefore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not necessarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before hose is re placed based on leakage 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be performed whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine oil change Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking scuffing or worn spots If there is any evidence of cracking scuffing or worn spots the hose should be replaced immediately Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Master Cylinder Brake F
368. the engine off in two 2 seconds if someone uses an invalid Fob to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Fob to start the engine Either of these condi tions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Fobs or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional part is physically held against the Fob being used to 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME start the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been progra
369. the ignition switch in any position except On or Start buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position engine does not need to be running and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt each time while unbuckling and re buckling the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the for
370. the pole in a counterclockwise rotation until it stops Pull upward to remove the bole from the base 6 Place the pole on the underside of the table top and secure with the hook and loop straps 7 Once the pole and table top are secured you may place them in the floor tub in front of the second row seats NOTE Always store the table and pole in the floor tub when not in use ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and some front seats The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat driver s outside mirror adjustable brake and accelerator pedals and radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the Unlock button is pressed Driver Memory Seat Switch Your vehicle may have been delivered with two Remote Keyless Entry transmitters One or both transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to four transmitters each one linked to either of the two memory positions 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory NO
371. their size ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Latch Plate 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click i UT Se m eee lm UT e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not po oo poe you properly The lap portion could ride too igh on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from
372. ther and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 The most common causes are e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains dt tect aint finish Take care n t e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation ang 1O pro Ect DOSE pam ase Care ent ve scratch the paint e ne and gravel impact i E gravel impact e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing e Insects tree sap and tar that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint P finish e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants CAUTION Washing Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car metal and painted surfaces wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water Special Care e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
373. thly 312 STARTING AND OPERATING EE If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the
374. tion with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora
375. tions 1 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 2 To remove the compact spare tire cover assembly assemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning freely this will allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 3902 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 3 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the Spare Tire Hook and pull the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle WARNING Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift 81390be2 Spare Tire Hook amp Removal NOTE If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle Refer to jack engagement locations in the following steps for proper jack placement E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393 4 Whe
376. to one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After ignition key is switched off a call can
377. to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined in
378. torage bin offers multiple configurations 4 Cup Holders with dishwasher safe liners for clean ing The cup holders can accept plastic bottles large cups or mugs with handles Top Tray Storage Upper Storage Bin can hold 9 regular or 18 thin CD s or other items e Large Console Center Storage will store headphones for the available rear DVD entertainment system or other items 12 volt DC Power Outlet provides continuous power inside the console for cell phones or other electronics Rear Occupant Accessible 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Multiple Adjustments e Removable from vehicle for additional floor space 81c27ac2 1 Release to slide console top rearward 2 Release to slide the center storage bin rearward 3 Release to remove the console The center console slides forward from design position to provide added user comfort Four cup holders each of which can accommodate large sized fast food beverage containers A one piece cup holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for cleaning The cup holders will also accommodate large size cups and 20 oz bottles Position 1 shows the console closed and shows 4 cup holders and a convenient storage tray Console Position 1 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large Dual Storage Bins storage area below Position 3 shows the top portion of the conso
379. torage pocket that will accommodate phone or hand held game Seats are removable 81bd1663 1 Release to Remove Seat 4 Seat Back Release 2 Fore Aft Adjustment Lever 5 Moveable Armrest 3 Swivel Release Lever Pulling the lower handle on the outboard side shield unlocks the seats for rotating The seats lock in the forward and rearward facing positions only 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Seatbacks fold forward on an angle not flat This allows the seats to swivel when the seat backs are folded WARNING Failure to comply with the following conditions could result in serious injury or even death e Never place any child seat or infant carrier in the Swivel n Go seat while it is in the rearward facing position The swivel seat should be locked in the forward position when using any child seat or infant carriers with the vehicle in motion Occupants riding in Swivel n Go seating must be wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked in either the forward or rearward position Removing Swivel n Go Premium Seating If Equipped 1 Remove any obstructions from the floor behind the seat and stow the Third Row Seat 2 Pull up on the release bar located at the bottom front edge of the seat 3 From behind the seat lift up on the rear of the seat cushion while pulling the seat in a rearward direction 4 Remove the seat from vehicle through the liftgate Rollers are part o
380. torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS g a Mirrors uoc ERE Y Roe Y o s 98 Power Remote Control Mirrors i If Equipped 4 aene 101 Inside Day Night Mirror
381. ty will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact ing sequi spare tire Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage brake controller is not required before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage en STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 WARNING Ibs 907 kg Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and
382. ual Lumbar If Equipped 134 Park Lights reels aere RI se acd emot 157 Stow n Go Seating If Equipped 135 Headlights 4 4 ss aen 157 Easy Access Seating 4340429949 9 Xu 144 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 158 Swivel n Go Premium Seating System Daytime Running Lights Canada Fleet If Equipped 215m ch ooo eueosls 145 Vehicles Only isse tekkse rae s es 159 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Lights On Reminder sss 159 Battery Protection llle 159 Headlight Delay If Equipped 160 Front Fog Lights If Equipped 160 Halo Lights If Equipped 161 B Multifunction Lever llle sess 162 T rti Signal Sae etus cem tr Dep Arp 162 Headlight Low High Beam Selector Switch 163 Flash To Pass Optical Horn 163 Windshield Wiper And Washer 163 Bi Tilt Steering Column If Equipped 166 H Rear Park Sense System If Equipped 166 Bl Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 170 ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 171 lo Ac yate s ea es Rex eR E RR as 172 To Set At A Desired Speed issus 172 To Deactivate To Resume Speed otare e m edie 172 To Vary The Speed Setting 173 To Accelerate For Pas
383. uctions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen If the words Time GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen proceed to Step 4 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 3 If the words Time User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen touch the bottom of the screen where the words User Clock are displayed The GPS time setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savin
384. uence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401 WARNING and Drive Usually the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between Reverse Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE With Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions The gear selector must be in NEUT
385. ueneleg 800Z DODGE 220 Caravan OWNER S MANUAL SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS E INTRODUCTION eek mex m Uer EP ceew e eile oe e x ENERE EENET E T CE E e 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 c cc ccc ccc hh tmn 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 cece cece ccc n nnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eee eeeeeeeee eee hh nn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 0 cc ccc cc cer cere eer hh hh hh nnn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 0 ce ccc cece cece cece een e eens hh mnn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ccc cc ccc cece c ccc ehh hh m hn 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 2c cece c ccc c ccc c cee hh hh i mnn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 00 cc cecccccccccccccvccecvcesvcesvces 10 INDEX Op EEUU INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction sse ee 4 Vehicle Identification Number 6 Bl How To Use This Manuadl ss 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 H Warnings And Cautions 0 6 4 INTRODUCTION EBENEN INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this
386. uid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation 464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se At Each Oil Change CAUTION e Change the engine oil filter Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Inspect the brake hoses and lines M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465 Required Maintenance Intervals Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 10 000 6 Rotate Tires 6 000 10 000 6 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner 12 000 20 000 12 filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 Replace the air conditioning filter 12 000 20 000 12 Inspect the CV Joints Perform the first inspection at M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months UP ipis at Inspect Exhaust System Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months ane isan a Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends a
387. ully closed prior to opening the fuel door 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Sliding Door Open Flash When the sliding door s are opened the left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12 seconds to alert other drivers in the area that passenger s could be entering or exiting the vehicle The Sliding Door Open Flash can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Place the key in the ignition switch 2 Cycle the ignition switch ON OFF four times ending in the OFF position do not start the engine 3 Within 10 seconds of the final cycle press the hazard switch 4 A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above mentioned procedure Power Sliding Door If Equipped The power sliding door may be opened manually or by using the buttons on the remote keyless entry transmitter Press the buttons on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice within five seconds to open a power sliding door Once the door is fully open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the door There are power sliding door switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat passengers Pressing the switch once will open the power sliding door once the door is fully open pressing the switch a second time will close the door NOT
388. ur tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gage even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Telltale Lamp NOTE Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Basic TPMS without EVIC If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and too main tain the proper pressure The Basic TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Wheel Sensors e TPMS Telltale Lamp The TPMS Telltale Lamp will illuminate in the l instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the in
389. user s safety or the safety of others 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than e The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP TCS Indicator Light instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATUR
390. utton will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 modes SCAN Button Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When mm writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Leve
391. vice Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob tained immedi
392. vice for training and remember to plug it back in If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof control switch is located in the front overhead console The sunroof panel tilts upward at the rear for ventilation or slides rearward under the roof Opening Sunroof Manual Press the switch rearward and hold and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically During this opera tion any release of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch r
393. wer seats are fused by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver s seat The Power Windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit breaker located under the instrument panel near the steering column If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove the 20 Amp mini fuse in the Integrated Power Module labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Center amp Rear Dome Light 578 Center amp Rear Reading Lights 578 Front Door Courtesy Light 578 Front Header Reading Lights If Equipped 578 Instrument Cluster Lights PC74 Liftgate Light s llle 578 Overhead Console Reading Lights PC579 Removable Console Light If Equipped 194 Visor Vanity Lights leise 6501966 EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
394. when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position After 3 minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK posi tion and the headlight switch in any position other than 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M OFF or AUTO the lights will turn off automatically until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch The battery protection feature will be disabled if the ignition switch is turned to any other position other than LOCK during the 3 minute delay Headlight Delay If Equipped This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlighted area To activate the delay feature turn off the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The 90 second delay inter val begins when headlight switch is turned off If the headlights or park lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned on the delay will be cancelled The driver can choose when exiting the vehicle to have the headlights remain on for 30 60 or 90 seconds or not remain on To change the timer setting see a Qualified Dealer Service Technician If the headlights are turned off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition off to activate this feature Front Fog Lights If Equipped O To activate the front fog l
395. will be too low 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or 6 in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
396. will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for information on this system NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 3 amp 3 8 Liter Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Compartment illustration in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi ficati
397. will have the full TIN including date code then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar 811adOdO Tire Placard Location STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRO THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS NEVER EXCEED XXX KG T125 70D15 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RA 4N109268 J 811b5a9a
398. wing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings Trailer And Tongue Weight Towing Requirements Towing Tips ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se EN STARTING AND OPERATING 309 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the WARNING inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a belts number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever Ac cidents can also be caused by pressing the accel erator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheating and ve hicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Automatic Transmission
399. y However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 WARNING e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injure
400. y are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Cleaning High Gloss Front Door and Pillar Appliques When cleaning the front door B pillar appliques care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Remove all dirt with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners Glass cleaners are not recommended If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 To maintain the high gloss shine apply a scratch and swirl remover onto a damp cloth and apply to door applique Rub the applique with a firm pressure then buff lightly with a clean cotton cloth until a high gloss shine is achieved Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susce
401. yless entry transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is fully open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pressing the button located on the overhead console 81 bbf7ac 1 Left Sliding Door Switch 2 Power Liftgate 3 Right Sliding Door Switch 4 Sliding Door Master Lock The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening Pushing once will close the liftgate only This button cannot be used to open the liftgate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away NOTE e If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance Liftgate Close Button Wh thi te kevl t t itter butt i ess d id Eh on Tan Ron pin Key s bi There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate opening Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position feature is enabled the tail lights will flash to signal that the liftgate is opening or closin
402. you to manually access the liftgate area The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pressing the button located on the overhead console If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear pillar pushing once will close the liftgate only The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch To Open Close Left Power Sliding Door If Equipped Press the LEFT button twice within five seconds to open close the left power sliding door If the button is pushed while the door is being power closed the door will reverse to the full open position If the vehicle is not equipped with a left power sliding door and the door is closed and locked pressing the button twice will result in the left side doors becoming unlocked ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 To Open Close Right Power Sliding Door If Equipped Press the RIGHT button twice within five seconds to open close the right power sliding door If the button is pushed while the door is being power closed the door will reverse to the full open position If the vehicle is not equipped with a right power sliding door and the door is closed and locked pressing the button twice will result in the right side doors becoming unlocked To Turn Off Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock If Equipped If desired the Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature can be turned on and off by performing the following procedure 1 Press the LOCK button for 5 to 10 se

2008 RT Caravan Owner Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents